2012 Nissan Armada | Owner's Manual | Nissan USA

®

2012 ARMADAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

AR

MA

DA

TA

60

-D

Printing : July 2011 (17)

Publication No.: OM2E TA60U0

Printed in U.S.A. TA60-D‘12

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory installed options, your ve-hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-cessories installed by NISSAN or by yourNISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is importantthat you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,warnings, cautions and instructions concerningproper use of such accessories prior to operatingthe vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSANdealer for details concerning the particular ac-cessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheeldrive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-ing collision and rollover”, and “Drivingsafety precautions”, in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries,may contain perchlorate material. The fol-lowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Visteon andXanavi InformaticsCorporation.

Gracenote� is aregistered trademark ofGracenote, Inc. TheGracenote logo andlogo type, and the“Powered byGracenote” logo aretrademarks ofGracenote.

APD1005

XM Radio� requiressubscription, soldseparately. Not avail-able in Alaska, Hawaiior Guam. For moreinformation, visitwww.xmradio.com.

© 2011 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

For U.S. [email protected]

For Canadian [email protected]

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

1. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-25)2. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-25)3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-57)4. Front seat belts (P. 1-25)5. Head Restraints (P.1-8 )6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-57)7. Seats (P. 1-2)8. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-64)9. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-70)10. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-57)11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-38)12. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor

(P. 1-52)13. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap

anchor (P. 1-53)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0154

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-28)3. Windshield (P. 8-20)4. Power windows (P. 2-51)5. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key™,

keys (P. 3-5, 3-12, 3-2)6. Mirrors (P. 3-32)7. Tire pressure (P. 9-13)8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)9. Tire chains (P. 8-43)10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-33)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-30)12. Fog light switch (P. 2-34)13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0123

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Roof rack (P. 2-50)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-14)3. Glass hatch (P. 3-28)4. Rear window washer (P.2-29)5. Glass hatch release (P.3-28)6. Lift gate release (P. 3-27)7. Rearview monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-33)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-33)9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-28, P. 9-4, 9-5)10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-28)11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0111

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Rear ventilators (P. 4-35)2. Storage (P. 2-40)3. DVD entertainment system

(if so equipped) (P. 4-77)4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)5. Map lights (P. 2-58)6. Sun visors (P. 3-31)7. HomeLink� (P. 2-59)8. Glove box (P. 2-42)9. Seats (P. 1-2)10. Cup holders (P. 2-44)11. Luggage storage (P. 2-48)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0022

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Vents (P. 4-35)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-30)3. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-33)4. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/hands-free Bluetooth� phone(if so equipped) (P. 4-74)

5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-57, P. 2-35)

6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicatorlights (P. 2-4, 2-13)

7. Cruise control main/set switches(P. 5-20)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch andrear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-28, P. 2-29)

9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)10. Display screen/Display screen with

navigation system* (if so equipped)(P. 4-2, P. 4-16)

11. Navigation system* controls(if so equipped) (P. 4-16)

12. Audio system controls (P. 4-40)13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-57)14. Glove box (P. 2-42)15. Hazard lights (P. 2-34)WIC1378

INSTRUMENT PANEL


16. Climate controls (P. 4-36)17. Power outlet (P. 2-39)18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-35)19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-37)20. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38)21. Shift selector (P. 5-14)22. Heated steering wheel (if so equipped)

(P. 2-36)23. Center stack storage (P. 2-40)24. Power outlet (P. 2-39)25. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-66)26. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-54)27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-22)28. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-30)29. Rear or front and rear sonar system off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)30. Pedal position adjustment switch

(P. 3-30)31. Power vent window (if so equipped)

(P. 2-54)32. Lift gate open/close switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.


1. Battery (P. 8-14)2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)3. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WDI0630

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock Braking Sys-tem (ABS) warninglight

2-14

Automatic transmissioncheck warning light

2-14

Automatic transmissionpark warning light( model)

2-14

or

Brake warning light 2-14

Charge warning light 2-15

Check suspensionwarning light (if soequipped)

2-15

Warninglight

Name Page

Engine oil pressurelow/engine coolanttemperature highwarning light

2-15

4WD warning light( model)

2-16

Low fuel warning light 2-16

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-16

Master warning light 2-18

Seat belt warning lightand chime

2-18

Supplemental air bagwarning light

2-18

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Front passenger airbag status light

2-19

High beam indicatorlight (Blue)

2-19

Malfunction indica-tor light (MIL)

2-19

Security indicatorlight

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-20

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) offindicator light

2-20

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped for passenger’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(for driver’s seat and if so equipped forpassenger’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42nd row captain’s chair adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52nd row bench seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head restraints (1st row only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head restraints (2nd row – outboardpositions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Adjustable headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173rd row power folding seats (if so equipped) . . . . . 1-23

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49Installing top tether strap (2nd row captain’schairs or 2nd row bench seat[if so equipped] ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52Installing top tether strap(3rd row bench seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72

WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped forpassenger’s seat)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)position.

LRS0244 LRS0245

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT(for driver’s seat and if so equipped forpassenger’s seat)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” for automatic drive po-sitioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

LRS0633


Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-back for occupants of different sizes for addedcomfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in thissection). Also, the seatback can be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

LRS0634 LRS0635 WRS0369


Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe 2nd row captain’s chairs can be tipped for-ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row benchseat. To enter the 3rd row �1 , raise the armrest soit is parallel to the seatback and in the stowedposition, then lift up on the seatback latch locatedon the upper corner of the seatback on the 2ndrow captain’s chair and fold the seatback forwardat an angle over the seat base. This will releasethe back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Then �2 lift up on the lower corner of the seatbase and tip the 2nd row captain’s chair forward.To exit the 3rd row bench seat, lift up on the sameseatback latch and fold the seatback forwardonto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat baseand tip it forward.

2ND ROW BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-back for occupants of different sizes for addedcomfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in thissection). Also, the seatback can be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

WRS0415 LRS0372Outboard seats

WRS0369


WARNING

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat and adjust the seat belt properly.See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later in this section.

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe outboard seating positions on the 2nd rowbench seat can be tipped forward for easy entryor exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the3rd row �1 , lift up on the seatback latch locatedon the upper corner of the seatback on the 2ndrow bench seat and fold the seatback forward atan angle over the seat base. This will release theback of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Then �2 lift up on the lower corner of the seatbase and tip the outboard seating position of the2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd rowbench seat, lift up on the same seatback latchand fold the seatback forward onto the seat base.Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

WARNING

When returning the seatbacks to the up-right position, be certain they are com-pletely secured in the latched position. Ifthey are not completely secured, passen-gers may be injured in an accident orsudden stop.

WRS0414 LRS0331


ARMRESTSTo use the armrests, pull them down to the rest-ing position.

�A Stowed position

�B Resting position

HEAD RESTRAINTS (1st row only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

WRS0368


The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. The first row headrestraints are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped withan adjustable headrest.

Components1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2071 LRS0887


AdjustmentAdjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

WRS0134 LRS0888 LRS0889


RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highestposition.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seatingposition.

Install1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction. The stalk withthe adjustment notches �1 must be installedin the hole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before anoccupant uses the seating position.

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position.

LRS0890 LRS0891 SPA1025


Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly asdescribed in this section.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (2nd row –outboard positions only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. The second rowhead restraints are removable but not adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.


LRS2071


Components1. Head restraint

2. Lock knob(s)

3. Stalks

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the headrestraints.

1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary.

2. Push and hold the lock knob(s).

3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removedfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad-just the seat or seatback before an occupantuses the seating position.

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holesin the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction.

2. Push the head restraint down until it locks inplace.

LRS2073 LRS2074 LRS2075


ADJUSTABLE HEADREST

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement theother vehicle safety systems. They mayprovide additional protection against in-jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustthe headrests properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the adjustable headrest stalksor remove the adjustable headrests. Donot use the seat if the adjustable head-rests have been removed. If the headrestwas removed, reinstall and properly adjustthe headrest before an occupant uses theseating position. Failure to follow theseinstructions can reduce the effectivenessof the adjustable headrests. This may in-crease the risk of serious injury or death ina collision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with adjustable headrests. All of theheadrests are adjustable.


+ Indicates the seating position is not equippedwith a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

LRS2072


Components1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the headrest so the center is level with thecenter of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up.LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888


To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe headrest down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loosein the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestbefore an occupant uses the seating posi-tion.

Install1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure the headrest is facingthe correct direction. The stalk with the ad-justment notches �1 must be installed in thehole with the lock knob �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push theheadrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-cupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891


FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passenger’s seatback(if so equipped)To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forextra storage length when transporting longitems:

�1 Slide the seat to the rear-most position bymoving the switch backward until the seatcomes to a stop. Then recline the seatbackas far forward as possible using the reclineswitch. Lift up on the latch located on theupper corner of the seatback to release theback of the seat.

LRS0341


�2 Once the seatback is released, it will enableyou to fold the front passenger seatback flatover the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to aseating position, lift up on the seatback andpush it up to an upright position. Move therecline switch backward until the desiredangle is obtained.

WARNING

● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Se-cure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. See“Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the front passenger’s seatwhen it is in the fold-down position. Useof these areas by passengers could re-sult in serious injury in an accident orsudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row captain’s chairs (ifso equipped)To fold the 2nd row captain’s chairs flat for maxi-mum cargo hauling:

�1 Raise the armrest to the stowed position.Remove the 2nd row center console, see“2nd row center console” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this Owner’sManual.

�2 Pull the strap forward, located in the centerof the seat cushion, and fold the seat cush-ion toward the front of the vehicle.

LRS0342 LRS0332


�3 Pull the strap to release the head restraintrearward.

�4 Then lift up on the recline lever to fold theseatback flat forward.

�5 There is a carpet panel flap that can befolded toward the back of the vehicle.

LRS2063 LRS2096 LRS2097


�6 The carpet panel flaps provide a level cargofloor when the 3rd row seats are also foldedflat. Reverse this process to return the 2ndrow captain’s chairs to a seating position.Make sure to properly raise the seat-back to an upright position and pushthe seat cushion down into place.

7. Rotate the head restraint forward to return itto the normal seating position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normalseating position, the head restraints mustbe returned to the upright position toproperly protect vehicle occupants.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (if soequipped)To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximumcargo hauling:

�1 Pull the strap forward, located in the centerof each seat cushion, and fold each seatcushion toward the front of the vehicle.

LRS2066 LRS2098


�2 Pull the strap to release the head restraintrearward.

�3 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side ofthe outboard seats to fold the outboard seat-backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat,pull up on the strap on the edge of the centerseat cushion and fold the seatback towardthe front of the vehicle.

�4 There is a carpet panel flap on the back ofeach seat that can be folded toward theback of the vehicle.

LRS2063 LRS2099 LRS2068


�5 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargofloor when the 3rd row seats are also foldedflat.

6. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seatsto a seating position, reverse the process forthe outboard seats.

7. To return the center seat to a seating posi-tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back ofthe seat base while lifting on the seatback.Then push the seat cushion back into place.Make sure to hold the seat belts abovethe seat cushion and properly raise theseatback to an upright position. Thenpush the seat cushion down into place.

8. Rotate the head restraint forward to return itto the normal seating position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normalseating position, the head restraints mustbe returned to the upright position toproperly protect vehicle occupants.

Folding the 3rd row split bench seat (ifso equipped)

To fold the 3rd row split bench seat flat formaximum cargo capacity:

1. Disconnect and secure the center seat beltand tongues into the retractor base. See“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” laterin this section.

2. Lower the head restraints to the full downposition.

3. Then pull up on the latch located on theoutside corner of each seatback and fold theseatback forward over the seat base.

LRS2078 LRS0637


To return the 3rd row split bench seat to a seatingposition, unfold the seatback and push it backuntil it latches into position.

WARNING

● When returning the seatbacks, be sureto attach the rear center seat beltconnector.

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

3RD ROW POWER FOLDINGSEATS (if so equipped)

The 3rd row power folding seat controls arelocated behind the 2nd row seat (passenger’sside) on the 3rd row cup holder console �1 .There are also controls located on the rear quar-ter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats (passen-ger’s side) �2 .

Before operating the 3rd row seats:

● Make sure the 2nd row seatback isn’t re-clined.

● Lower the 3rd row headrest to the full downposition.

● Disconnect and secure the center seat beltand tongues into the retractor base. See“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” laterin this section.

– Always reconnect the center seat beltwhen the seat is returned to the uprightposition.

● Make sure that there are no objects on theseatback cushion.

CAUTION

Make sure the seat(s) is returned to thefull upright position before a passengersits in the seat(s).

When folding or returning the seat(s) tothe upright position, to avoid injury toyourself and others:

● Make sure that the seat path is clearbefore moving the seat.

● Be careful not to allow hands or feet toget caught or pinched in the seat.

LRS0792


To fold down the 3rd row seats, push and holdthe bottom portion of the switch.

To raise the 3rd row seats, push and hold the topportion of the switch.

A chime will sound three times to indicate thestart of the operation.

A warning beep will sound 5 times if the seat isn’tin the full upright or folded position when theignition switch is placed in the ON position. If thewarning beep is still present after one completecycle and if the seats are in the full upright orfolded position, bring your vehicle in for service.

If the ignition switch is off, the power foldingseats are always operational.

If the ignition switch is on, the power folding seatsare only operational when the shift selector is in P(Park) or N (Neutral).

If the engine is started during operation, theseat(s) will temporarily pause.

NOTE:

Operating the power folding seats can dis-charge the vehicle battery if the vehicle isnot running.

LRS0793


PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014


PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.


● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Manual seat shownWRS0174


�2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock dur-ing a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits the seatbelt to move and allows you somefreedom of movement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Thensmoothly pull the belt out of the re-tractor.

�3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

�4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

WRS0137 WRS0138


WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139


Center of the 3rd row bench seatThe 3rd row center seat belt has a connectortongue �1 and a seat belt tongue �2 . Both theconnector tongue and the seat belt tongue mustbe securely latched for proper seat belt opera-tion.

WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt orinstalling a child restraint. Do not usethe seat belt or child restraint with onlythe seat belt tongue attached. Thiscould result in serious personal injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop.

SSS0240 SSS0241

LRS0432


Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt

When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd rowcenter seat belt can be retracted into a stowedposition as follows:

�1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seatbelt does not retract suddenly when thetongue is released from the connectorbuckle. Release the connector tongue byinserting a suitable tool such as a key into theconnector buckle �A .

�2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

�3 Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabricsleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure theconnector tongue into the retractor base.

WARNING




LRS0433


Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt

Always be sure the 3rd row center seat beltconnector tongue and connector buckle are at-tached. Disconnect only when folding down therear seat.

To connect the buckle:

�1 Pull out the connector tongue from the re-tractor base.

�2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabricsleeve.

�3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < marks.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelts” earlier in this section.

WARNING




Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontand 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out �1 the adjustment button andmove the shoulder belt anchor �2 to the desiredposition so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulderbelt anchor into position.

Front and 2nd row outboard seatsLRS0242


WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender that is compatible withthe installed seat belts is available that can bepurchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in(200 mm) of length and may be used for eitherthe driver or front passenger seating position.See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-chasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.


Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt may cometoo close to the face or neck. The lap beltmay not fit over their small hip bones. In anaccident, an improperly fitting seat beltcould cause serious or fatal injury. Alwaysuse appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child re-straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seatbelt. See the “Child restraints” section for moreinformation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over 1 year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facingchild restraint as long as possible up to the heightor weight limit of the child restraint. Forward-facing child restraints are available for childrenwho outgrow rear-facing child restraints and areat least 1 year old. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

CHILD SAFETY


LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lapportion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-men. The booster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the top, middle portion of the shoulderand the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seatcan only be used in seating positions that have athree-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Once the child has grown sothe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS


WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” laterin this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. An inflating air bag could seri-ously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only beused in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand loads from childrestraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

WRS0256


This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on forward-facing childrestraints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH system lower anchor locations -captain’s chairs

WRS0364


The LATCH lower anchor points are provided toinstall child restraints in the following positionsonly:

● 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)

● 2nd row bench seat outboard positions only(if so equipped)

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

LATCH system lower anchor locations -bench seat

WRS0416

LATCH lower anchor locationLRS0748


LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

LATCH label locations 2nd row captain’schairs (if so equipped)

LRS0344

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench (if soequipped)

LRS0382

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661


When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

● If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con-tacts the top tether strap when it isattached to the top tether anchor, re-move the cargo cover from the vehicleor secure it on the cargo floor below itsattachment location. If the cargo coveris not removed, it may damage the toptether strap during a collision. A childcould be seriously injured or killed in acollision if the child restraint top tetherstrap is damaged.

● Do not allow cargo to contact the toptether strap when it is attached to thetop tether anchor. Properly secure thecargo so it does not contact the toptether strap. Cargo that is not properlysecured or cargo that contacts the toptether strap may damage it during acollision. A child could be seriously in-jured or killed in a collision if the toptether strap is damaged.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662

2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)LRS2100


1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locationsAnchor points are located in the following loca-tions:

● 2nd row bench (if so equipped) on the floorbehind the outboard seating positions asshown.

● 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped) onthe floor behind the seats as shown.

● 3rd row bench seat on the floor of the cargoarea behind the center seat position asshown.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCHsystem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)LRS2069

3rd row bench seatLRS0640


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673


4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint or try installing byusing the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

Rear-facing – step 4LRS0674 WRS0256


WARNING

● The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured. See“Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt”in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256



3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.





6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraints” sections beforeinstalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint in the 2nd row seats using theLATCH system:


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Installing top tether strap” in thissection. Do not install child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap in seat-ing positions that do not have a top tetheranchor.


Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0799


3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint when the child restraint is re-moved. See “Head restraints” in this sectionfor head restraint adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6WRS0697


7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

When installing a child restraint system inthe rear center position, both the centerseat belt connector tongue and buckletongue must be secured. See “Attachingthe 3rd row center seat belt” in thissection.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-fore, must not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint or headrest to obtain the correct childrestraint fit. If the head restraint or headrestis removed, store it in a secure place. Besure to reinstall the head restraint orheadrest when the child restraint isremoved. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-able headrest” in this section for head re-straint or headrest adjustment, removal andinstallation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint or headrest and itis interfering with the proper child restraintfit, try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699


3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.





6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section. Donot install child restraints that require the useof a top tether strap in seating positions thatdo not have a top tether anchor.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.




10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see, �Front passengerair bag and status light� in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP(2nd row captain’s chairs or 2nd rowbench seat [if so equipped] )

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchors (2nd row captain’s or bench out-board seating positions only) or the seat belt, asapplicable.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-straint to position the top tether strap �1over the top of the seatback. If the headrestraint is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. See


2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)LRS2100

2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)LRS2069


“Head restraint adjustment” in thissection for head restraint adjustment,removal and installation information.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint �2 on the floor behind the child re-straint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-stallation procedure steps in this sectionbefore tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap on the rear seat, consultyour NISSAN dealer for details.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP(3rd row bench seat)

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraintwith a top tether strap can only be used inthe center position. Do not place in anoutboard seating position and attempt toangle the tether strap to the centerposition.

The center position of the 3rd row bench seat isthe seating position that can use a top tetherstrap.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt,as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap �1 over the topof the center seating position seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint �2 on the floor behind the child re-straint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-stallation procedure steps in this sectionbefore tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap child restraint on the rearseat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-tails.3rd row bench seat

LRS0640


BOOSTER SEATSPrecautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a sudden stop or collision greatlyincreases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child’sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455 LRS0453


Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat �1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat �2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0464


1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall thehead restraint when the booster seat isremoved. See “Head restraints” in this sec-tion for head restraint adjustment, removaland installation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper booster seat fit, try anotherseating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags: This system can help cushionthe impact force to the chest area of the driverand front passenger in certain side impact colli-sions. The supplemental side air bag is designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in front and rear outboardseating positions in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bagsare designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both curtain androllover air bags are designed to inflate and re-main inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is placed in theON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031


WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041


WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain and rollover air bagsinflate if they are not properly re-strained. Pre-teens and children shouldbe properly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact and rollover supplemental airbags:

● The side air bags and curtain and roll-over air bags ordinarily will not inflate inthe event of a frontal impact, rear im-pact, or lower severity side collision.Always wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against the door.

WRS0431


WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain and rollover air bags are mosteffective when you are sitting well backand upright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162


WARNING

● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, you maybe seriously injured. Be especially care-ful with children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159


1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)4. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules5. Crash zone sensor6. Occupant classification system control

unit7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor)8. Seat belt buckle switches9. Seat belt with pretensioner10. Satellite sensors11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.WRS0366


The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and seat beltusage for the driver. For the front passenger, itadditionally monitors the weight of an occupantor object on the seat and seat belt tension. Basedon information from the sensors, only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending on thecrash severity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontpassenger air bag may be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions, depending on theweight detected on the passenger seat and howthe seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will beilluminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light willnot be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and the driver and

passenger seated upright as far as practicalaway from the steering wheel or instrumentpanel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order tohelp protect the front occupants. Because of this,the force of the front air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, oris against, the front air bag module during infla-tion.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position.



Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated under the climate controls. After the igni-tion switch is placed in the �ON� position, thefront passenger air bag status light on the instru-ment panel illuminates for about 7 seconds andthen turns off or remains illuminated dependingon the front passenger seat occupied status. Thelight operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). Based on the

WRS0475


weight on the seat detected by the occupantclassification sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the advanced air bagsystem determines whether the front passengerair bag should be automatically turned OFF asrequired by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF; however, if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode(child restraint mode), this could cause the airbag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to beseated and wearing the seat belt properly for themost effective protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the ALR mode (child restraint mode) mayallow the restraint to tip or move in an accident orsudden stop. This can also result in the passen-ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of beingOFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.


If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areaon the driver’s side of the instrument panel, willblink. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment and prob-ing devices should not be used on theair bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.


Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all3 rows. These systems are designed to meetvoluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk ofinjury to out-of-position occupants. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed. The side air bags and curtain androllover air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type of collision are similarto those of a higher severity side impact. They aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. They may not inflate in certain sidecollisions.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed toinflate in certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements(for example, during severe off roading) maycause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain androllover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke is notharmful and does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritationand choking. Those with a history of a breathingcondition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest ofthe front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bagshelp to cushion the impact force to the head ofoccupants in the front and rear outboard seatingpositions in all rows. They can help save lives andreduce serious injuries. However, an inflatingside air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may

cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bagsand curtain and rollover air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover airbags inflate quickly in order to help protect theoccupants. Because of this, the force of the sideair bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in-flated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags operate only when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON or START posi-tion.


WRS0381


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain and rolloverair bag systems. This is to prevent dam-age to or accidental inflation of the sideair bag and curtain and rollover air bagsystems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thecurtain and rollover air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain and rollover air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors areyellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bags andcurtain and rollover air bag system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but a pretensioner is not acti-vated, be sure to have the pretensionersystem checked and, if necessary, re-placed by your NISSAN dealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.


● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

Working with the seat belt retractor, the preten-sioner helps tighten the seat belt when the ve-hicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light isused to indicate malfunctions in the pretensionersystem. (See �SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT� in this section for more de-tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bagwarning light indicates there is a malfunction,have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

WRS0885


SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-sioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags and pretensioners are designedto inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bagwarning light remains illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement of thesesupplemental air bag systems should be doneonly by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags, pretensioners and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition switch should al-ways be in the LOCK position when workingunder the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain and rollover air bag has inflated,the air bag module will not functionagain and must be replaced. Addition-ally, the activated pretensioners mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pretensioner should be replaced bya NISSAN dealer. The air bag moduleand pretensioner cannot be repaired.

LRS0100


● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainand rollover air bag systems and thepretensioner system should be in-spected by a NISSAN dealer if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-rect disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-21

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . 2-30Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-32Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-37Front and rear sonar system off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442nd row center console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-47Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58HomeLink� universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-59

Programming HomeLink�. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59Programming HomeLink� for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60Operating the HomeLink� universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button . . . . . . 2-61If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

1. Vents (P. 4-35)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-30)3. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-33)4. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/hands-free Bluetooth� phone(if so equipped) (P. 4-74)

5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-57, P. 2-35)

6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicatorlights (P. 2-4, 2-13)

7. Cruise control main/set switches(P. 5-20)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch andrear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-28, P. 2-29)

9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)10. Display screen/Display screen with

navigation system* (if so equipped)(P. 4-2, P. 4-16)

11. Navigation system* controls(if so equipped) (P. 4-16)

12. Audio system controls (P. 4-40)13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-57)14. Glove box (P. 2-42)15. Hazard lights (P. 2-34)WIC1378

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

16. Climate controls (P. 4-36)17. Power outlet (P. 2-39)18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-35)19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P. 2-37)20. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38)21. Shift selector (P. 5-14)22. Heated steering wheel (if so equipped)

(P. 2-36)23. Center stack storage (P. 2-40)24. Power outlet (P. 2-39)25. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-66)26. Auxiliary jack (P. 4-54)27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-22)28. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-30)29. Rear or front and rear sonar system off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)30. Pedal position adjustment switch

(P. 3-30)31. Power vent window (if so equipped)

(P. 2-54)32. Lift gate open/close switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Warning/indicator lights2. Tachometer3. Engine coolant temperature gauge4. Voltmeter5. Fuel gauge6. Speedometer

7. Automatic transmission fluid tempera-ture gauge

8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/VehicleInformation Display

9. Engine oil pressure gauge

WIC1243

METERS AND GAUGES


1. Speedometer2. Odometer/twin trip display3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Odometer only

Elapsed time, driving distance and averagespeed information is also available for vehicleswith navigation system (if so equipped). Refer to“Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion later in this manual.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 secondresets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

WIC1502 WIC1245


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone �1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range �1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

WIC1246 LIC1135


FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.After a few driving trips. the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running. Theneedle should be in the middle of the gauge whenthe engine is running.

LIC1199 LIC1198


CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

VOLTMETERWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-age. When the engine is running, it indicates thegenerator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (11 – 15 volts) �1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE

This gauge indicates the temperature of the au-tomatic transmission fluid. The automatic trans-mission fluid temperature is in the normal range�1 when the gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.

LIC1136 WIC1247


CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow automatic transmission fluid level.Use the dipstick to check the fluid level.(See “5-speed automatic transmissionfluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

● If the gauge indicates automatic trans-mission fluid temperature over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. Have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-ued operation of the vehicle may seri-ously damage the transmission.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the or button as described in thecharts below to activate various features of theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror.Type A

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsAutomatic anti-glare/indicator lighttoggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

Type B

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)


COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the or button for about 1 sec-ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition to toggle the compass direction display�1 on or off. The display will indicate the directionthat the vehicle is heading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

Type AWIC0904

Type BLIC0583


Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about 5seconds. The current zone number will ap-pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to togglethrough the zone numbers until the desirednumber appears in the display. Once youhave selected a zone number, the displaywill show a compass direction within a fewseconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.

WIC0355


1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe button for about 10 seconds. The“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-minate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicleone and a half circles at a maximum speed of6 MPH (10 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

● If the compass deviates from the correctindication soon after repeated adjustment,have the compass checked at an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

● The compass may not indicate the correctcompass point in tunnels or while driving upor down a steep hill. (The compass returnsto the correct compass point when the ve-hicle moves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

● If a magnet is located in or near the overheadconsole in the front of the vehicle or thevehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag-netism is disturbed, the compass displaymay not indicate the correct direction.

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.


or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

4WD warning light ( model) High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic Transmission check warning light Low fuel warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Low tire pressure warning light Security indicator light

or Brake warning light Master warning light Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Check suspension warning light(if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicatorlight

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff (if so equipped):

or , , , , ,

,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


WARNING LIGHTSFor additional information on warnings and indi-cators, see “Vehicle information display” later inthis section.

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Automatic Transmission checkwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.If the light comes on at any other time, it mayindicate the automatic transmission system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

WARNING

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercase is in neutral.

● When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illuminatesand the parking brake is set. Failure toengage the transfer position in 2WD,AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in thevehicle moving unexpectedly, resultingin serious personal injury or propertydamage.

● The warning light may come on whenthe ignition switch is ON and the shiftselector is placed in the P positionwhile shifting the transfer case be-tween 4H and 4LO. Shift the 4WD shiftswitch to the 2WD, AUTO, 4H, or 4LOposition again to turn off the ATP warn-ing light when the warning light comeson. Before shifting the 4WD switch intothe 4LO position or out of 4LO in the 4Hposition, move the shift selector intothe N position. Shift the shift selectorinto the P position and make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light is ON andthe ATP warning light is OFF.

This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive positionwhile the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,the transmission will disengage and the drivewheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.


Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator

When the parking brake is released and thebrake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brakewarning light and the Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate theABS is not functioning properly. Have the brakesystem checked, and if necessary, repaired by aNISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warning light” in this section.)

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. Refer to “Variablevoltage control system” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section laterin this manual.

● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Check suspension warninglight (if so equipped)

This light may indicate a malfunction in the auto-leveling suspension.

For additional information, refer to “Jacking upvehicle and removing the damaged tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section of this manual.

Engine oil pressure low/Engine coolant temperaturehigh warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure or highengine coolant temperature.


If the light flickers or comes on during normaldriving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop theengine and allow it to cool. If the light remains onafter checking the oil and coolant, stop the en-gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer orother authorized repair shop.

This light is not designed to indicate a lowoil or low coolant level. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick and check the coolant level onthe reservoir. See “Engine oil” and “Checkingengine coolant level” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual. Also see “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

● Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

● If the gauge indicates engine coolanttemperature over the normal range,stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-sible. If the engine is overheated, con-tinued operation of the vehicle may se-riously damage the engine. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section for immediate ac-tion required.

4WD warning light (model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position. It turnsoff soon after the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,the warning light will either remain illuminated orblink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksduring operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WDwarning light turns on when you aredriving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the shift selector to the N posi-tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.

● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.


The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning alsoappears in the vehicle information display.If you select the tire pressure informationin the display (if so equipped), the LOWPRESSURE warning message will be dis-played. The tire pressure for each tire willalso be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is activeas long as the low tire pressure warning lightremains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Vehicle informa-tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section andin the “In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSUREwarning does not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-function.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section in thismanual.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch in the ON position, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still comes on while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.


● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, themaster warning light illuminates if any of the fol-lowing are displayed on the vehicle informationdisplay.

● No key warning

● Low fuel warning

● Low windshield-washer fluid warning

● Parking brake release warning

● Door/liftgate open warning

● Loose fuel cap

● Check tire pressure warning

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, front seat-mounted side-impact air bag ,roof-mounted curtain and rollover air bag andpretensioner systems need servicing and yourvehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioners may not function properly. For addi-tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.


WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag systemsand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings and indi-cators, see “Vehicle information display” later inthis section.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-

tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap ifthe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears inthe vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or installthe cap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does not turnoff after a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed to thedealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.


– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system orthe traction control system is operating, thusalerting that the vehicle is nearing its tractionlimits. The road surface may be slippery.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, thetransfer case is in the 4LO position (model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem is not functioning properly. This indicatesthe Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-ating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF light alsocomes on when you place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The light will turn off after about2 seconds if the system is operational. If the lightstays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-tor light while you are driving, have the VehicleDynamic Control system checked by a NISSANdealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.


Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

The vehicle information display �1 is located tothe left of the speedometer. It displays such itemsas:

● automatic transmission position indicator

● cruise control system information

● Intelligent Key operation information (if soequipped)

● some indicators and warnings

● other information

For details about the Intelligent Key, see“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAYPress the vehicle information display INFO but-ton �1 located on the instrument panel to togglethrough the following modes.

MPG → Range → Warning

Rotate the INFO button �2 to highlight the de-sired menu option within the selected mode.Press the INFO button �1 to enter the high-lighted menu.

WIC1248 WIC1249

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY


The icons at the bottom of the display screenshow the options available:

ENTER — Press the INFO button to selecta highlighted option.

NEXT — Rotate the INFO button to high-light an option.

Warning mode

The warning mode can be selected to view anywarnings that may be present. Once the screen isselected you have the option of skipping thewarning or viewing it in detail.

Warnings can be present for issues such as anopen door or low fuel. For more information aboutpotential warnings see “Vehicle information dis-play warnings and indicators” later in this section.

WIC1166


Vehicle information display warningsand indicators

1. Door and liftgate open warning

2. Lock warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™model)

3. Low fuel warning

4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning

5. No key warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™model)

6. Parking brake warning

7. Shift P warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™model)

8. Cruise main switch indicator

9. Cruise set switch indicator

LIC2005


10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dischargeindicator (NISSAN Intelligent Key™ model)

11. Transfer 4LO position indicator (model)

12. 4WD shift indicator ( model)

13. Shift selector position indicator

14. Loose fuel cap warning

15. Check tire pressure waning

Door and liftgate open warning

This warning illuminates when a door, the liftgateor the liftgate glass has been opened when theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Lock warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™model)

This warning illuminates and a chime sounds ifthe ignition switch has been in the ACC or ONposition and then placed in the OFF position.

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK positionand the warning and chime will turn off.

Refer to “Shift P warning” in this section foradditional information.

Low fuel warning

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in thefuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-serve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

No key warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key™model)

This warning illuminates following two condi-tions:

1. When the ignition switch is pushed and theIntelligent Key cannot be recognized by thesystem. If this warning illuminates, you can-not start the engine.

Check for the following causes and performthe assigned remedies:

– The battery of the Intelligent Key carriedwith you is discharged completely. Re-place the battery with a new one.

– The Intelligent Key carried with you is notregistered to the system. Use the regis-tered Intelligent Key.

– You do not have an Intelligent Key withyou. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.

2. When the door is closed with the IntelligentKey left outside the vehicle and the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or ON position. Achime will also sound.

Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brakeis set and the vehicle is driven.

SHIFT P warning (NISSAN IntelligentKey™ model)

This warning illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ACC or OFF position and the shiftselector is in any position other than (Park) posi-tion. Also, a chime sounds when the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift selectorto the P (Park) position or start the engine.

If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)position, the lock warning will appear. Refer to“Lock warning” in this section.

For additional information about Intelligent Key,see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.


Cruise main switch indicator

This indicator illuminates when the cruise controlmain switch is pushed. The indicator turns offwhen the main switch is pushed again. When thecruise main switch indicator illuminates, thecruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dis-charge indicator (NISSAN Intelligent Key™model)

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Keybattery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the batterywith a new one. See “Battery replacement” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Transfer 4LO position indicator (model)

This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shiftswitch is set in the 4LO position with the ignitionswitch placed in the ON position.

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO positionand the indicator blinks, stop the vehicle, driveslowly forward and the indicator will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop thevehicle, move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position, then depress and turn the 4WD shiftswitch to 4LO or 4H.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theswitch while driving.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you have firststopped the vehicle and moved the shift selectorto N (Neutral). Make sure the transfer 4LO posi-tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WDshift switch to 4LO.

The indicator may blink while shifting fromone drive mode to the other.

4WD shift indicator ( model)

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator will illuminate the position selected by the4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator may blink whileshifting from one drive mode to the other.

Automatic transmission position indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator shows the shift selector

position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap isnot tightened correctly after the vehicle has beenrefueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire pressurewarning light in the meter illuminates and low tirepressure is detected. If this warning appears,stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. See “Lowtire pressure warning light” earlier in this sectionand “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section.


Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with:

● the power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed).

● the key — master or mechanical (NISSANIntelligent Key™ models).

● any request switch (NISSAN IntelligentKey™ models).

● the keyfob or NISSAN Intelligent Key™.

Keyfob and NISSAN Intelligent Key™ opera-tion:

● Push the button. All doors lock.The hazard lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once to indicate all doors arelocked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section or“Comfort & Convenience settings” in the“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems” section.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key, a requestswitch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if theignition switch is placed in the ACC or ONposition, the system will not arm.

LIC0559

SECURITY SYSTEMS


● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for a period of time, unlock thedoor once and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition switch placed in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates ifthe vehicle is tampered with again. The alarmcan be shut off by unlocking the driver’s doorwith the key, a request switch or by pressingthe button on the keyfob or IntelligentKey.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key, arequest switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key(even if the door is unlocked by using theinside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s doorwith the key, pressing the button on thekeyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all doorswith any request switch (Intelligent Key models).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (forexample, when interference is caused by anotherregistered key, an automated toll road device orautomatic payment device on the key ring), restartthe engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ONposition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.


Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob toward�A (Slower) or �B (Faster). Also, the inter-mittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion. Refer to “Comfort & convenience set-tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems” sec-tion later in this manual.

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up �4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

LIC0474 LIC0965

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH


CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer reservoir is empty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-voir with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. So methyl alcohol basedwindshield-washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled with filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufactur-er’s recommended levels before pour-ing the fluid into the windshield-washerreservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

�1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation(not adjustable)

�2 ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward �3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the washer fluidconcentrate and water.

LIC0966

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH


To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors:

Start the engine and push the rear window de-froster switch. The rear window defroster indica-tor light on the display screen comes on. Push theswitch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

�2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

LIC1173

Type AWIC1250

Type BWIC1186

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for a period of time afteryou place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-justed. See “Comfort & convenience set-tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems�sec-tion later in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion �1 .

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain ON for a period of time. If another door isopened while the headlights are on, then thetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position.

Type CSIC3019 WIC1251


Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor �1 located in the topside of the instrument panel. The autolightsensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it isdark out and the headlights will illuminate.If this occurs while parked with the engineoff and the ignition switch placed in the ONposition, your vehicle’s battery could be-come discharged.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off aftera period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again if the headlightswitch is moved to the OFF position and then

turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-

LIC0836 WIC1252


ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in

the , or AUTO position (with auto-lights activated).

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

WIC1506 WIC1253


FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch inthe AUTO position, the headlights must be on, thenturn the fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

WIC1254 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH


To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of thesteering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, asdesired, depending on the temperature. Theindicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use theseat heater if you or the occupants cannotmonitor elevated seat temperatures orhave an inability to feel pain in body partsthat contact the seat. Use of the seatheater by such people could result in se-rious injury.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

LIC0604 WIC1441

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)


● If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

The heated steering wheel system is designed tooperate only when the surface temperature of thesteering wheel is below approximately 68°F(20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warmthe steering wheel after the engine starts. Theindicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel isbelow 68°F (20°C), the system will heat thesteering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),then turn off automatically.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steeringwheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

The heated steering wheel switch isequipped with a 30 minute timer. After theswitch has been activate for 30 minutes,the system will automatically turn off.If thesurface temperature of the steering wheelis above 68°F (20°C) when the switch isturned on, the system will not heat thesteering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

LIC0421

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if soequipped)


The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

The rear sonar system is active when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position and the shiftselector is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m)of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

LIC1548 LIC0471

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(if so equipped)


WARNING

● The front sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for properdriving.

● The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

The front sonar system:

● is active when the ignition is in the ONposition and the shift selector is in a forwardgear position.

● a beeping tone is emitted when the sensorsdetect obstacles within 3 ft (1.0 m) of thefront bumper.

The rear sonar system:

● is active when the ignition is in the ONposition and the shift selector is in R (Re-verse).

● a beeping tone is emitted when the sensorsdetect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m) of therear bumper.

The front and rear sonar system can be disabledby pushing the OFF switch. When the system isdisabled, the indicator light on the switch willilluminate. Push the switch again to enable thesystem. The indicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

See “Front sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavytrailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehiclein the tow mode with no trailer/load or lighttrailer/light load will not cause any damage. How-ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and thetransmission/engine driving characteristics mayfeel unusual.

Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi-nates when tow mode is selected. Press the towmode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

LIC1182 LIC0594

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEMOFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

TOW MODE SWITCH


For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

Front rowLIC1193

2nd rowLIC0550

POWER OUTLET


The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlets located on the driver’s side ofthe instrument panel and in the luggage area arepowered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

The power outlets located on the passenger’sside of the instrument panel and in the 2nd roware powered only when the ignition switch is inthe ACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquids to contact the outlet.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGETRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

Luggage areaLIC0551

Center stack storageLIC1183

STORAGE


CONSOLE BOX

Console box storage trays

Console box storagePull up on the lever �1 to open the console box lid�2 .

Console box lockUse the master key to lock �1 or unlock �2 theconsole box.

LIC1369 LIC1370 LIC1371


GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking �1 or unlocking �2 theglove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

LIC1176 WIC0673


MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETThe seatback pocket is located on the back of thedriver seat. The pocket can be used to storemaps.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

LIC1195 LIC0575Small bin

LIC0568


Storage bins

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

Push the button to open a storage bin.

Push the lid up to close.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Medium bin (if so equipped)LIC0569

Large binLIC0570

FrontWIC1507


Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder sothat the cup is held securely.

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the frontconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

AdjustableLIC1373

2nd row (rear of front console)LIC0554

2nd row center console (if so equipped)LIC0555


CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

2nd row bench (if so equipped)LIC0556

3rd rowLIC0557

Bottle holderWIC1197


2ND ROW CENTER CONSOLE (if soequipped)Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid.

Removing the 2nd row center consoleboxTo remove the 2nd row center console box:

�1 Lift out the cup holder tray.

�2 Pull up on the handle to tilt the console boxup.

�3 Move the console box toward the front of thevehicle and lift it out.

To reinstall the 2nd row center console box:

1. Slide the console box over the base towardthe rear of the vehicle.

2. Push down to lock the console box in place.

3. Replace the cup holder tray.

LIC0576 LIC0577


CARGO AREA STORAGE BINTo open the cargo area storage bin, pull down onthe tab and pull the lid off.

CAUTION

Placing additional items in the area speci-fied for the jack may dent body panel ordamage power back door assembly (if soequipped).

To access the floor storage area, push down �1to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle �2to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.

LIC0571 LIC2014 LIC0572


WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● Use suitable ropes and hooks to securecargo.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-gage area. It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

Side finisherWhen hooking on ropes, do not apply a load ofmore than 55 lb (245 N) to a single �A hook or 44lb (196 N) to a single �B hook.

Floor hooksDo not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)to a single hook.

LTI0089 LTI0090


ROOF RACK

WARNING

● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle isloaded at or near the cargo carryingcapacity, especially if the significantportion of that load is carried on theroof rack.

● Heavy loading of the roof rack has thepotential to affect the vehicle stabilityand handling during sudden or abnor-mal handling maneuvers.

● Roof rack load should be evenlydistributed.

● Do not exceed maximum roof rack loadweight capacity.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

LIC1177


Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 200 lbs (91 kg) onentire roof rack. Be sure load is evenly distributedacross both crossbars. Be careful that your ve-hicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWRare located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located onthe driver’s door pillar). For more informationregarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicleloading information” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section later in this manual.

The crossbars can be adjusted forward andbackward. Loosen the thumbwheel �1 and ad-just the crossbar to the desired position. Tightenthe thumbwheel. Place your luggage on the barsand secure the luggage with rope to the utilityloops �2 . Do not place luggage on the side railsor tie rope directly to the side rails. Always besure the thumbwheels are fully tightened to keepthe crossbar in place. Do not use utility loops forany purpose other than securing luggage.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for aperiod of time after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of time, thepower to the windows is canceled.

LIC1200

WINDOWS


1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side automatic switch4. Right rear passenger window switch5. Left rear passenger window switch6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch andhold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down �1 .To close the window, pull the switch up �2 .

LIC1181 WIC1237


Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down �1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. To stop thewindow, press the switch down while the windowis closing.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,or jump started, the power window auto-reversefunction may not operate properly. If this occurs,please contact the dealer to re-initialize thepower window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

WIC1255 LIC0410


POWER VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)Use the vent window switch located on the driv-er’s side of the instrument panel to open andclose the power vent windows. The windowscannot be operated separately.

To open the power vent windows press and holdthe switch.

To close the windows pull up and hold the switch.

The power vent windows operate when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position, or for aperiod of time after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of time, thepower to the vent windows is cancelled.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)To open a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you until it releases.

To lock the window in the open position, push thelatch handle rearward until it locks.

To close a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you and push the rear portion ofthe latch toward the rear of the vehicle until itlocks.

LIC1417 LIC0524


AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. The auto-matic moonroof is operational for a period of time,even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position. If the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door is opened during this period ofabout 45 seconds, power to the moonroof iscanceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-ward the open position �3 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the switchtoward the close position �4 .

To open or close the moonroof part way, push theswitch in any direction �5 while the moonroof issliding open or closed to stop it in the desiredposition.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to-ward the up position �1 . When the moonroof isopen, it will automatically close and then tilt up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switchtoward the down position �2 .

Restarting the moonroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn moonroof operation to normal.

1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch repeatedly toward the down position�2 to fully close the lid.

2. Push and hold the tilting switch for morethan 2 seconds toward the down position�2 to reestablish the lid’s home position.

The moonroof should now operate normally.

Auto-reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-matic operation when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position or for a period of timeafter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

WIC0812

MOONROOF (if so equipped)


When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after a period of timeunless the ignition switch is in the ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR position �2 , theinterior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped)will stay on for a period of time when:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

LIC0585

INTERIOR LIGHT


● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activatedwhen:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position �3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition. The puddle lights (if so equipped) comeon when any front or rear passenger door isopened.

The lights will turn off automatically after a periodof time while doors are open to prevent the bat-tery from becoming discharged.

NOTE:

The footwell lights (if so equipped) anddoor step lights illuminate when the driverand passenger doors are open regardlessof the interior light switch position. Theselights will turn off automatically after aperiod of time while doors are open toprevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHTThe console light �1 will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjustedwith the illumination brightness control.

LIC0587


The personal lights on the overhead console canbe swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light,press the button. Press the button again to turnoff the light.

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch tothe desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminateswhen the lift gate or glass hatch is opened. Thelight turns off when the lift gate or glass hatch isclosed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless oflift gate position or lock status.

LIC0588 LIC0586 LIC0590

PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT


The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink� will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLink� Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink� Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information, refer to “Program-ming HomeLink�” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLink�Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK�

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLink� buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light �1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface.

WIC0986

HOMELINK� UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLink� button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLink� flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLink� button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink� blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLink� has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLink� to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener’s program but-

ton, quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLink� button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLink� button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink� button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLink� buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink� buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLink� buttons, refer tothe HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK� FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLink�, continue to press and hold theHomeLink� button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLink�”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

WIC0987


NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK�UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink� Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver button. The amber indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink� does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLink� surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLink� andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink� surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink� is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK� BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink� Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLink� surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLink� indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLink� buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLink�buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLink�. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.


FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Operating the manual lift gate(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Operating the power lift gate(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Cancel switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)3. Key number plateNISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System components.

WPD0128 WPD0427

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. The new keys must beregistered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use withthe Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-tion process requires erasing all memory in theIntelligent Key components when registering newkeys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that youhave to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,NISSAN recommends erasing the ID codeof that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.This may prevent the unauthorized use ofthe Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,which can be used in case of a discharged bat-tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation inthe same way as an ordinary key.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet, givethem the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box or console box frombeing opened during valet hand-off, follow theprocedure below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box or console box with themechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet andkeep the mechanical key with you.

See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the console boxlock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.


When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear �2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral �3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors �4 .

Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Driver’s sideLPD0240

DOORS


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position �1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position �2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position �1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position �2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition switch and anydoor open, all doors will lock and then unlockautomatically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

● All doors lock automatically when the vehiclespeed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-nition is placed in the OFF position (modelswith Intelligent Key system) or when the keyis removed from the ignition switch (modelswithout Intelligent Key system).

The automatic unlock function can be de-activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-vate the automatic door unlock system, performthe following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,push and hold the power door lock switch tothe position (UNLOCK) for more than5 seconds.

Inside lockLPD0241 WPD0381


4. When activated, the hazard indicator willflash twice. When deactivated, the hazardindicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac-tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position (models withIntelligent Key system) or when the key is re-moved from the ignition switch (models withoutIntelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-ally, use the inside lock knob or the power doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-mits radio waves when the buttons arepushed. The FAA advises radio wavesmay affect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operate theremote keyless entry keyfob while onan airplane. Make sure the buttons arenot operated unintentionally when theunit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped),and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfobfrom outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigationsystem, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”later in this section. For vehicles with navigationsystem, refer to “Comfort & convenience set-tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section later in thismanual.

LPD0420

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(if so equipped)


Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance ofapproximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. Theeffective distance depends upon the conditionsaround the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged.

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob, which containselectrical components, to come intocontact with water or salt water. Thiscould affect the system function.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not change or modify the keyfob.

● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If thekeyfob gets wet, immediately wipe untilit is completely dry.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the keyfob with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the keyfob near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field,such as a TV, audio equipment and per-sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209


● When the button is pressed with alldoors locked, the hazard warning lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you press thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicleswithout navigation system, refer to “Silencing thehorn beep feature” later in this section. For ve-hicles with navigation system, refer to “Comfort &convenience settings” in the “Monitor, climate,audio, phone and voice recognition system” sec-tion of this manual. Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionswitch in any position except the ON posi-tion.

● The interior lights and puddle lights (if soequipped) turn on and the light timer acti-vates for a period of time when the interiorlight switch is in the DOOR position with theignition switch in any position except the ONposition.

Press the button on the keyfob againwithin 5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing by inserting the key into the ignition switchand placing it in the ON or START position,locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing theinterior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD0210


Opening windowsThe keyfob allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simultane-ously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Operating the power lift gate (if soequipped)Press and hold the button on the keyfob for about0.5 seconds to open or close the lift gate. Thehazard warning lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power open or power close se-quence has started.

The lift gate will reverse direction immediatelyduring power open or power close if the keyfobbutton is pressed. A chime will sound to an-nounce the reversal.

For more information, see “Lift gate” later in thissection.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for a period of time, or

● any button is pressed on the keyfob.

LPD0243 LPD0211


Using the interior lights

Press the button on the keyfob once toturn on the interior lights and puddle lights (if soequipped).

For additional information, refer to “Interior light”in the “Instruments and controls” section in thismanual.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD0262


WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function or pushingthe request switch on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. The operatingenvironment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions.

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key indicator will illuminate after the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec-trically, unlocking the steering wheel with theignition switch in the LOCK position is impossiblewhen the vehicle battery is completely dis-charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos-sible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)


ignition switch. Pay special attention that thevehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the IntelligentKey:

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.


OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch �1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key operating rangebecomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key maynot function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch �1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

SPA2038 WPD0375


● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry theIntelligent Key with you and then lock thedoors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition and make sure you carry the Intelli-gent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch whilecarrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

WPD0411 WPD0412


NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handles or the rear liftgateopener switch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-ating the request switch to lock the door.Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket oryour other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

WPD0413


Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch againwithin 30 seconds to unlock all doors.

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the power liftgate handle or press thepower liftgate button.

3. Power back door open.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the following operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the rear liftgate are openor not closed securely.

WPD0412 WPD0413


● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

WPD0359


Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pressing the button:

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of timewhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting byperforming one of the following operations:

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simultane-ously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the Intelligent Key.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memoryIf the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

WPD0360


Releasing the rear lift gate

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-onds to open the rear lift gate. The rear lift gaterelease button will not operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for aperiod of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

● It has run for a period of time, or

● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

● Pushing the request switch on the driver orpassenger door with the Intelligent Key inrange of the door handle.

WPD0414 WPD0415


Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning is displayed inthe instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning isdisplayed, be sure to check the vehicle and theIntelligent Key.

See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and“Vehicle information display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.WPD0362


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that areprogrammed for the vehicle. If another IntelligentKey is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehiclesystem may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engineThe SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-play and the inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver’s door to get outof the vehicle

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

When closing the door after getting out ofthe vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3 timesand the inside warning chime sounds forapproximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-play and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC positionand the shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion and place the ignition switch in theOFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lockknob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.The door handle request switch is pushedbefore the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch afterthe door is closed.


�1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

�2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.


● Always be sure that hands and feet areclear of the door frame to avoid injurywhile closing the lift gate.

LPD0244

HOOD LIFT GATE


OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFTGATE (if so equipped)The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the lift gate simultane-ously.

To open the lift gate, pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-curely.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, the shift selector must be in P (Park).Also, the power lift gate will not operate ifbattery voltage is low. Additionally, theglass hatch must be fully closed in order toopen, close or reverse the power liftgate.

Power Open:The power lift gate automatically moves from thefully closed position to the fully open position in

approximately 5 – 8 seconds. The power openfeature can be activated by the switch on thekeyfob, the instrument panel switch and by theoutside opener handle. The hazard lights flashand a chime sounds to indicate the power opensequence has been started.

● The lift gate can be opened by the instru-ment panel switch and the keyfob even if thevehicle is locked. The lift gate will individuallyunlock and open. Once the lift gate isclosed, its lock will align to the vehicle’s lockor unlock status.

LPD0245Rear pillar switch

LPD0247

Instrument panel switchLPD0283


● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the lift gate opens.

● The lift gate must be unlocked to open it withthe outside opener handle.

● The switch on the rear pillar cannot be usedto open the lift gate.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selector ismoved out of P (Park) during a power openoperation.

Power Close:The power lift gate automatically moves from thefully open position to the secondary position.When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi-tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power closetakes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The powerclose feature can be activated by the switch onthe keyfob, the instrument panel and the rearpillar. The hazard lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power close sequence has beenstarted.

● If the outside opener handle is activatedwhile the cinching motor is engaged, thecinching motor will disengage and releasethe latch.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the lift gate closes.

● The switch on the rear pillar can only be usedto close the lift gate if the cancel switch isnot in the on position.

Reverse:The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi-ately during power open or power close if thekeyfob, instrument panel or rear pillar switch ispushed or if the outside handle is lifted. A chimewill sound to announce the reversal.

Auto Reverse:If an obstacle is detected during power open orpower close, a warning chime will sound and thelift gate will reverse direction and return to the fullopen or full close position. If a second obstacle isdetected, the lift gate motion will stop and thedrive motor will disengage. The lift gate will entermanual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch stripduring power close, the lift gate will reverse di-rection and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the lift gate.

Manual Mode:If power operation is not available, the lift gatemay be operated manually. Power operation maynot be available if the cancel switch is in the onposition, if multiple obstacles have been de-tected in a single power cycle, or if battery volt-age is low.


Safe Mode:If the lift gate gas stays �1 lose pressure, thepower lift gate safe mode is activated. When thesafe mode is activated, the lift gate slowly closes.A continuous warning chime sounds until the liftgate is in the fully down position. Then the lift gatewill be pulled to the closed and latched positionby a motor.

The power lift gate cannot be opened using theswitches at any time in the safe mode.

The auto reverse function remains active whilethe lift gate is closing in the safe mode.

Do not operate the lift gate again until it ischecked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● If the power lift gate does not stay openor if the lift gate unexpectedly closes atany time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the lift gate gas stays.Have the lift gate inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power lift gate if oneor both of the lift gate gas stays areremoved. Damage to the lift gate orpower lift gate mechanisms may occur.

CANCEL SWITCHPush the switch toward the CANCEL position todisable the rear pillar switch. The lift gate can stillbe opened and closed using the switch on theinstrument panel and keyfob. The lift gate canalso be opened manually with the outside handleif the lift gate is unlocked.

LPD0250 LPD0248


LIFT GATE RELEASE

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

CAUTION

● If the power lift gate does not stay openor if the lift gate unexpectedly closes atany time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the lift gate gas stays.Have the lift gate inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power lift gate if oneor both of the lift gate gas stays areremoved. Damage to the lift gate orpower lift gate mechanisms may occur.

Manual lift gate (if so equipped)If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked withthe door lock switch or the keyfob due to adischarged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate .

2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

Power lift gate (if so equipped)If the lift gate cannot be opened with the doorlock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery,follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever up to open the lift gate.

Manual lift gate releaseLPD0251

Power lift gate releaseLPD0252


To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle torelease the glass hatch, then pull up on the glasshatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatchdown securely.

NOTE:

The lift gate must be unlocked in order toopen the glass hatch.

WARNING

Do not drive with the glass hatch open.This could allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaustgas” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also causethe Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler doorlabel can operate on E-85. Fuel systemor other damage can occur if E-85 isused in vehicles that are not designedto run on E-85.

LPD0246

GLASS HATCH FUEL-FILLER DOOR


● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properlytightened. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSEFUEL CAP warning appears may causethe Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) to illuminate.

● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.If the light illuminates becausethe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,tighten or install the cap and continueto drive the vehicle. The lightshould turn off after a few driving trips.If the light does not turn off after afew driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected by a NISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionin this manual.

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise toremove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder �1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warningThe LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in thevehicle information display when the fuel-fillercap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle hasbeen refueled. It may take a few driving trips forthe message to be displayed. To turn off thewarning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

LPD0391 LRS2005


3. Push the INFO button �A on the instrumentpanel located behind the steering wheel forabout 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUELCAP warning �B after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

For additional information, see “Fuel recommen-dation” and “Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-ommendation” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section in this manual.

TILT OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desired posi-tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position away fromthe driver �1 or toward the driver �2 .

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

WARNING

Do not adjust the pedal position whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

WPD0428 WPD0429

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT


CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

�1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

�2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

�3 To block glare from the side and front, swingdown the sub-sun visor.

�4 Slide the extension sun visor in or out asneeded.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

LPD0256

SUN VISORS


VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. The vanitymirror will illuminate when the mirror cover isopen.

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position �2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims during night time conditions and ac-cording to the intensity of the headlights of thevehicle following you. The automatic anti-glarefeature is activated when the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors�1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation.

LPD0257 WPD0126

MIRRORS


Type AWith the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, press the button as described:

● To turn off the anti-glare feature, pressthe button. The indicator light will turnoff.

● To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressthe button again. The indicator lightwill turn on.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is operating.

For more information about the compass andcompass features �2 (if so equipped), see“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

Type B and Type CThe indicator light �2 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

● the O button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn off.

Type ALPD0446

Type B-Without compassLPD0469


To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,press:

● the | button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn on.

Some vehicles are also equipped with automaticanti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa-tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors” inthis section.

For information on HomeLink� Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if soequipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position.

Rotate the round switch �1 to select the right orleft mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired po-sition pushing the round switch.

Type C-With compassLPD0470 LPD0418


WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Manual folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Power folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power foldingmirrors. Manually folding the mirrors candamage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

LPD0259 LPD0417


If one of the mirrors are manually operated orbumped, the mirror body can become loose atthe pivot point. To correct electronic mirror op-eration, cycle the mirrors by pushing the“CLOSE” switch until completely closed, thenpush the “OPEN” switch until the mirrors are inthe open position.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (ifso equipped)

The outside mirrors will automatically dim duringnighttime conditions to reduce the glare from theheadlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on whenstarting the vehicle. The indicator light on theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminatewhen the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-ing.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press thebutton on the rearview mirror. The indicator lightwill turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again, pressthe button on the rearview mirror. The in-dicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” earlier in this section.

Heated mirrorsThe outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)


MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-

mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual and “Pedal posi-tion adjustment” and “Outside mirrors” ear-lier in this section.

During this step, do not place the ignitionswitch in any position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memorypositionEach keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure:

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch orthe ignition switch is moved to OFF, pressthe button on the keyfob. The driver’s seat,accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mir-rors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob automaticallyre-links.

Confirming memory storage

● Place the ignition switch in the ON positionand push the SET switch. If the main memoryhas not been stored, the indicator light willcome on for approximately 0.5 seconds.When the memory has stored the position,the indicator light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

LPD0419


● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory storage function willbe canceled and must be restarted before astored memory position can be set again.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the memory storage function. Youcan also restart the memory storage functionusing the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

Once the memory storage function has beenrestarted, you can store a memory position.See “Memory storage function” in this section.

Selecting the memorized positionSet the shift selector to the P (Park) position,then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or

● Place the ignition switch in the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,and outside mirrors will move to the memorizedposition with the indicator light blinking, and thenthe light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the shift selector isplaced in the P (Park) position. This allows thedriver to get into and out of the driver’s seat moreeasily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened.

● When the driver’s door is opened with theignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

● When the ignition switch is turned fromACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-tion:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is closed.

● When the driver’s door is closed with theignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

● When the ignition switch is turned fromACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see“Comfort & convenience settings” in the “Moni-tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section of this manual. For vehicleswithout navigation system, see your NISSANdealer.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the entry/exit function. You can also restartthe entry/exit function using the following proce-dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.


● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● When the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the shift selector is moved from P(Park) to any other position.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga-tion system, see “Comfort & convenience set-tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section of thismanual. For vehicles without navigation system,see your NISSAN dealer.


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Control panel buttons — color screen withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-41Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56CompactFlash� (CF) player operation(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Music Box� (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63CD/CF (CompactFlash�) care and cleaning . . . . . . 4-72Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Before operating the DVD mobileentertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82Remote control operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106

Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-107

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-109Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117

NISSAN Voice Recognition System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118

NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-118Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122NISSAN Voice Recognition AlternateCommand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137Speaker Adaptation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-142

WARNING

● Positioning of the heating or air condi-tioning controls and display controlsshould not be done while driving in or-der that full attention may be given tothe driving operation.

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. NISSAN controller (P. 4-3)

2. STATUS button (P. 4-4)

3. + (brightness control) button

4. OFF brightness control button(P. 4-16)

5. INFO button (P. 4-4)

6. – (brightness control) button

7. SETTING button (P. 4-9)

8. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3)

WHA0881

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLORSCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

● The glass display screen may break if itis hit with a hard or sharp object. If theglass screen breaks, do not touch it.Doing so could result in an injury.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition) for a long time, it will dischargethe battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key, you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE NISSANCONTROLLERUse the NISSAN controller to choose an item onthe display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-play using the main directional buttons �2 or thecenter dial �3 . Then press the ENTER button �1to select the item or perform the action.

The BACK button �4 has two functions:

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button �4 during setup,the setup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button �4accepts the changes made during setup.

WHA0883

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREENVehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-tion is made or menu item is highlighted, differentareas on the screen provide you with importantinformation. See the following for details:

1. Header:Shows the path used to get to the currentscreen (for example, press the SETTINGbutton > then select the “Audio” key).

2. Menu Selections:Shows the options to choose within thatmenu screen (for example, Bass, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:Shows that the NISSAN controller may beused to move UP/DOWN on the screen andselect more options.

4. Screen Count:Shows the number of menu selections avail-able for that screen (for example, 5/6).

5. Footer/Information Line:Provides more information (if available)about the menu selection currently high-lighted (for example, Enhances stereo imag-ing and sound).

HOW TO USE THE STATUSBUTTONTo display the status of the audio, climate controlsystem and fuel consumption, press the STATUSbutton.

The following information will appear when theSTATUS button is pressed:

Audio → Audio and climate control system →Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-erage fuel economy and distance to empty →Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTONPress the INFO button. The display screenshows vehicle information for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be aguide to determine the condition of the vehicle.See the following for details.

LHA0914 LHA0915


Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button to display Average FuelEconomy, Distance to Empty and Fuel EconomyRecord.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves,the fuel in the tank shifts, which maymomentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi(500 m). After a reset or connecting the batterycables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” keyusing the NISSAN controller.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key, then select the “View” key usingthe NISSAN controller.

The average fuel consumption history will bedisplayed in a graph form along with the averagefuel for the previous reset-to-reset period.

LHA0921 LHA0922


Tire pressure information (if soequipped)

To display tire pressure information, press theINFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” keyusing the NISSAN controller and press the EN-TER button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s traveling conditionand the temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


Trip computerPress the INFO button, then select the “TripComputer” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button.

The trip computer will display the following items:

● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance – Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed – Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

LHA0923 LHA0924


Resetting the trip computer

Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs tobe reset using the NISSAN controller and pressthe ENTER button.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer selectthe “Reset ALL”key and press the ENTER button.A confirmation screen will appear. Select the“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

Maintenance itemsPress the INFO button and select the “Mainte-nance” key using the NISSAN controller; themaintenance information will be displayed on thescreen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton to display the screen to change the main-tenance interval.

Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button. Use theNISSAN controller to change the maintenanceinterval. To accept the changes, press the BACKbutton.

LHA0925 LHA0926


Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using theNISSAN controller.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to displaythe MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-tor light will illuminate when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-tomatically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The “Reset” key is selected.

● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set toOFF (indicator light not illuminated).

● The maintenance interval is set again.

LHA0839


HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle. Usethe NISSAN controller to select each item to beset and press the ENTER button.

Display settingsSelect the “Display” key. The Display settingsscreen will appear.

Type ALHA0927

Type BWHA0937 LHA0929


Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” keyto adjust the brightness or contrast of the mapbackground. Use the NISSAN controller to adjustthe brightness to darker or brighter and the con-trast to lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The amber indicatornext to “Display ON” turns off and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on:

● Press the SETTING button, select the “Dis-play” key and then select the “Display ON”key. Then set the screen to on by pressingthe ENTER button, or

● Hold the OFF button for approxi-mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-ing display”will appear and the “Display ON”key will be automatically turned on (no am-ber indicator).

Background color:

Select the “Background Color” key; the displaycolor changes between day and night.


LHA0930 WHA0823


Beeps settingsSelect the “Beeps” key and press the ENTERbutton. The Beeps settings screen will appear.

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), abeep will sound if any control panel button ispressed.

Clock

The following display will appear after pressingthe SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”key using the NISSAN controller and pressingthe ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), a clock is always displayed in the upperright corner of the screen.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12–hour) clock display orthe 24h (24–hour) clock display.

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off thedaylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; theamber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0931 LHA0932


Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zonescreen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending onthe current location, by selecting the correct timezone key and pressing the ENTER button toenable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-nate for that location).

● Pacific

● Mountain

● Central

● Eastern

● Atlantic

● Newfoundland

● Aleutian

● Hawaii

● Alaska

Clock Adjust:

Adjust the time by manually inputting the correcttime.

● 0 – 9:Select to change the number in the display.

● Modify:Select to change the number at the cursorposition.

● >:Select to move the cursor position to theright.

● <:Select to move the cursor position to the left.

LHA0933 LHA0943


● OK:Select to accept the changes made andreturn to the clock setting display.

After selection/settings, press the BACK buttonor any other mode button to accept the changes.

Comfort & Convenience settings (if soequipped)Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using theNISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The comfort and convenience option screenwill be displayed.You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the NISSANcontroller, then pressing the ENTER button. Theindicator light (box at the right of the selecteditem) alternately turns on and off each time theENTER button is pressed.Indicator light is illuminated — ONIndicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on orturn off the illumination of the interior lights whenany door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjustthe sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher(right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to changethe duration of the automatic headlight off timerfrom 0-, 30-, 45-, 60-, 90-, 120-, 150- and180-second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turnon or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-cally according to the vehicle speed.

LHA0938 LHA0939


Remote Key Response Horn: Select to turnon or turn off the horn beep mode used when theLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Remote Key Response Lights: Select to turnon or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

NOTE:


Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Selective Door Unlock: When this item isturned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked firstafter the door unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,only the corresponding door is unlocked first. Allthe doors can be unlocked if the door unlockoperation is performed again within 1 minute.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors willbe unlocked after the door unlock operation isperformed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turnon or turn off the door lock/unlock function bypushing the door handle request switch.

Intelligent Key Lock Reply: Select to changethe sound of the Intelligent Key mode used whena door handle request switch is pushed to lock.

Select to turn off all sounds made when a doorhandle request switch is pushed, by selecting the“OFF” key.

Intelligent Key Unlock Reply: Select tochange the sound of the Intelligent Key modeused when a door handle request switch ispushed to unlock.


Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turnon or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwardfor easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFFposition and the driver’s door is opened. Aftergetting into the vehicle and pushing the ignitionswitch to the ACC position, the driver’s seatmoves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default: Select tochange all the comfort and convenience systemsto their default settings.

LHA0940


Language / UnitsUse the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-guage / Units” key. Select which setting you wantto change using the NISSAN controller.

Select Language:

Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the“Español” key to change the language shown onthe display.

Select Units:

Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the unitsshown on the display.

Audio settingsFor audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

LHA0934 LHA0935 LHA0936


OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe OFF button. Pressing the button againwill change the display to the day or thenight display. The brightness can then beadjusted using the NISSAN controller.

The display brightness can also be adjusted us-ing the + (brighter) button or the � (dimmer)button.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, thedisplay will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for morethan 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press thebutton again to turn the display on.

1. STATUS button (P. 4-20)

2. DEST button*

3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-17)

4. PHONE button**

5. OFF brightness control button(P. 4-32)

6. INFO button (P. 4-20)

7. SETTING button (P. 4-25)

8. VOICE button*

LHA0880

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-17)

10. ROUTE button*

11. ZOOM IN button*

12. MAP button*

13. ZOOM OUT button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

**For information on the PHONE button, see“Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System” later in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will discharge the battery, and theengine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key, you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE NISSANCONTROLLERUse the NISSAN controller to choose an item onthe display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-play using the main directional buttons �2 (cer-tain Navigation System functions use the addi-tional directional buttons �6 ) or the center dial�3 . Then press the ENTER button �1 to selectthe item or perform the action.

The BACK button �4 has two functions:

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button �4 during setup,the setup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens, pressing the BACK button �4accepts the changes made during setup.

For the VOICE button �5 functions, refer to theseparate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCHSCREEN

CAUTION

● The glass display screen may break if itis hit with a hard or sharp object. If theglass screen breaks, do not touch it.Doing so could result in an injury.

● To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

● Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system tomalfunction.

LHA0882


To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not availablewhile driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-ate the navigation system.

WARNING

● ALWAYS give your full attention todriving.

● Avoid using vehicle features that coulddistract you. If distracted, you couldlose control of your vehicle and causean accident. Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as thosefor the NISSAN controller are possible using thetouch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. To select the “Audio” key,touch the “Audio” key �1 on the screen. Touchthe “BACK” key �2 to return to the previousscreen.

Adjusting the item:

Touch the “+” key �1 or the “�” key �2 to adjustthe settings. Touch the “UP”key �3 to scroll up tothe previous page, or touch the “DOWN” key �4to scroll down to next page.

WHA0885 WHA0887


Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number key �1 .

There are some options available when inputtingcharacters.

● Uppercase:Shows uppercase characters.

● Lowercase:Shows lowercase characters.

● Space:Inserts a space.

● Symbols:Shows symbols such as the question mark(?).

● Delete:Deletes the last inputted character with onetouch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key todelete all of the characters.

● OK:Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenanceIf you clean the display screen, use a dry, softcloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use asmall amount of neutral detergent with a softcloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe thescreen.

START-UP SCREENWhen you place the ignition switch in the ACC orON position, the SYSTEM START-UP warning isdisplayed on the screen. When you read andagree with the warning, press the ENTER button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, you will notbe able to use the navigation system.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREENVehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-tion is made or menu item is highlighted, differentareas on the screen provide you with importantinformation. See the following for details.

1. Header:Shows the path used to get to the currentscreen (for example, press the SETTINGbutton > then select the “Comfort & Conv.”key).

WHA0889 LHA0890


2. Menu Selections:Shows the options to choose within thatmenu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-mination, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:Shows that the NISSAN controller may beused to move UP/DOWN on the screen andselect more options.

4. Screen Count:Shows the number of menu selections avail-able for that screen (for example, 1/14).

5. Footer/Information Line:Provides more information (if available)about the menu selection currently high-lighted (for example, Cabin lighting whenunlocking doors).

HOW TO USE THE STATUSBUTTONTo display the status of the audio, climate controlsystem, fuel consumption and navigation system,press the STATUS button.

The following information will appear when theSTATUS button is pressed:

Audio → Audio and climate control system →Audio, climate control temperature settings, av-erage fuel economy and distance to empty →Audio, climate control temperature settings andNavigation System → Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTONPress the INFO button; the display screen showsvehicle and navigation information for your con-venience.

The information shown on the screen should be aguide to determine the condition of the vehicle.See the following for details.

LHA0892


Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button to display Average FuelEconomy, Distance to Empty and Fuel EconomyRecord.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves,the fuel in the tank shifts, which maymomentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi(500 m). After a reset or connecting the batterycables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” keyusing the NISSAN controller and press the EN-TER button.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the “FuelEconomy” key, then select the “View” key usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

The average fuel consumption history will bedisplayed in a graph form along with the averagefuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

LHA0893 LHA0894


Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press theINFO button, then select the “Tire Pressure” keyusing the NISSAN controller and press the EN-TER button.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s traveling conditionand the temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


Trip computerPress the INFO button, then select the “TripComputer” key using the NISSAN controller andpress the ENTER button.

The trip computer will display the following items:

● Elapsed Time – Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance – Distance driven (miles orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed – Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

LHA0895 LHA0896


Resetting the trip computer

Each item in the trip computer can be reset to 0.Select the “Reset” key on the item that needs tobe reset using the NISSAN controller and pressthe ENTER button.

To reset all of the items in the trip computer selectthe “Reset ALL”key and press the ENTER button.A confirmation screen will appear; select the“Yes” key and press the ENTER button.

Maintenance itemsPress the INFO button and select the “Mainte-nance” key using the NISSAN controller; themaintenance information will be displayed on thescreen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the “Reminder (1 – 4)” keys usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton to display the screen to change the main-tenance interval.

Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button. Use theNISSAN controller to change the maintenanceinterval. To accept the changes, press the BACKbutton.

LHA0897 LHA0898


Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using theNISSAN controller.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to displaythe MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-tor light will illuminate when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-tomatically displayed as shown when both of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The “Reset” key is selected.

● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set toOFF (indicator light not illuminated).

● The maintenance interval is set again.

LHA0839


Other items

Press the INFO button and select the “Others”key using the NISSAN controller and press theENTER button to view information on the naviga-tion and voice recognition systems.

Voice Recognition

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition system” in this section.

Navigation version

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Traffic InfoRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Where am I?Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

GPS Satellite Info.Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding this item.

HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-tings screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle. Usethe NISSAN controller to select each item to beset.

LHA0908 LHA0884


Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The Display settings screen will appear.

Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” keyto adjust the brightness or contrast of the displaybackground. Use the NISSAN controller to adjustthe brightness to darker or brighter and the con-trast to lower or higher.


Display off:

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the“Display ON” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after five seconds.

LHA0901 LHA0902 WHA0823


To turn the screen on:

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayON” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the OFF button for approxi-mately two seconds and the message “re-suming display” will appear and the “DisplayON” key will be automatically turned on (noamber indicator).

Background color:

Select the “Background Color” key; the displaycolor changes between day and night.


ClockThe following display will appear after pressingthe SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”key using the NISSAN controller and pressingthe ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), a clock is always displayed in the upperright corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactlybecause it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12–hour) clock display orthe 24h (24–hour) clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing perminute.

Daylight Saving Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-nated), daylight saving time is on. To turn off thedaylight saving time, touch the “ON” key; theamber indicator light will disappear.

LHA0904


Time Zone:

Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zonescreen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending onthe current location, by selecting the correct timezone key and pressing the ENTER button toenable that time zone (indicator light will illumi-nate for that location).

● Pacific

● Mountain

● Central

● Eastern

● Atlantic

● Newfoundland

● Hawaii

● Alaska

After selection/settings, press the BACK buttonor any other mode button to accept the changes.

Comfort & Convenience settings

Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using theNISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The comfort and convenience option screenwill be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the NISSANcontroller, then pressing the ENTER button. Theindicator light (box at the right of the selecteditem) alternately turns on and off each time theENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

LHA0905 WHA1203


Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on orturn off the illumination of the interior lights whenany door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjustthe sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher(right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to changethe duration of the automatic headlight off timerfrom 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 secondperiods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turnon or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-cally according to the vehicle speed.

Remote Key Response Horn: Select to turnon or turn off the horn chirp mode used when theLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

NOTE:


Remote Key Response Lights: Select to turnon or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lightflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Selective Door Unlock: When this item isturned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked firstafter the door unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,only the corresponding door is unlocked first. Allthe doors can be unlocked if the door unlockoperation is performed again within one minute.

WHA1204 WHA1205


When this item is turned to off, all the doors willbe unlocked after the door unlock operation isperformed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turnon or turn off the door lock/unlock function bypushing the door handle request switch.

Intelligent Key Lock Reply: Select to changethe sound of the Intelligent Key mode used whena door handle request switch is pushed to lock.


Intelligent Key Unlock Reply: Select tochange the sound of the Intelligent Key modeused when a door handle request switch ispushed to unlock.


Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turnon or turn off the driver’s seat moving backwardfor easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFFposition and the driver’s door is opened. Aftergetting into the vehicle and placing the ignitionswitch in the ACC position, the driver’s seatmoves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default: Select tochange all the comfort and convenience systemsto their default settings.

Others settingsSelect the “Others” key using the NISSAN con-troller. Voice recognition, language and units set-ting screen will be displayed.

Voice Recognition:

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSANVoice Recognition system” later in this section.

LHA0909


Language / Units:

Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-guage / Units” key and press the ENTER button.Select which setting you want to change usingthe NISSAN controller and selecting either the“Select Language” key or the “Select Units” keyby pressing the ENTER button.

Select Language:

Select the “English” key or the “Français” key tochange the language shown on the display.

If you select the “Français” key, French languagewill be displayed so please use the French Own-er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-der Information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section.

Select Units:

Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the unitsshown on the display.

Audio settings

For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

LHA0911 LHA0912 LHA0913


Volume and beeps settingsNavigation volume

For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-mation regarding these settings.

Phone volume

For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation Sys-tem” later in this section.

Beep setting

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), abeep will sound if any control panel button ispressed.

Phone settingsFor phone settings refer to “Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation System”later in this section.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe OFF button. Pressing the button againwill change the display to the day or thenight display. The brightness can then beadjusted using the NISSAN controller.

If no operation is performed within 10 seconds,the display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for morethan two seconds to turn the display off. Pressthe button again to turn the display on.

WHA0903


When the shift selector is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows arearward view from the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The RearView Monitor is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance becausea wide-angle lens is used.

● Make sure that the lift gate is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled beside the lift gate handle.

● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to the bum-per line �A are displayed on the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper line �A inthe illustration.

�1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

�2 3 ft (1 m) yellow

�3 7 ft (2 m) green

�4 10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

LHA0437

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)


ADJUSTING THE SCREENTo adjust the quality of the screen, press theSETTING button.

● To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,Tint, Color, Contrast, and Black Level of theRearView Monitor, press the SETTING but-ton with the RearView Monitor on, thentouch one of the adjustment keys. Press the“–” or “+” key on the item and adjust thelevel.

● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tintand Color of the RearView Monitor while thevehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-verse), the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the RearView Monitor mode.However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the RearViewMonitor is displayed after the shift selectorhas been shifted to R (Reverse). Objectsmay be distorted momentarily until the Rear-View Monitor screen is displayed com-pletely. When the shift selector is returned toa position other than R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screen changes. Objectson the screen may be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pressing the SETTING button may notchange the brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the RearView Monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolor-ation. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.If body wax does get on the camera window,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

LHA1021


Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-senger’s side vents �1 , center vents �2 , and rearpassengers’ vents �3 and �4 by moving the ventslide and/or vent assemblies.

For the driver’s and passenger’s side vents�1 ,open or close by using the dial. Move the dialtoward the position to open the vents ortoward the position to close them.

LHA1030

VENTS


1. Driver’s temperature control dial/AUTObutton

2. A/C ON/OFF button3. Fan speed control (increase)4. Front window defroster button5. MODE button6. Passenger’s temperature control dial/

DUAL button7. System OFF8. Fan speed control (decrease)9. Rear window defroster button10. Air recirculation button

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressDUAL to activate dual climate control func-tions. Turn the passenger’s side temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to set thedesired passenger’s temperature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0859

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic)


● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from thevents in hot, humid conditions as the air iscooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-function.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the defroster control button toturn the system on. The display will show thedefrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, press the fan control speed buttonuntil it reaches the maximum speed .

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, press the AUTO button to return tothe auto mode.

● When the defroster control button isactivated, the air conditioner will automati-cally be turned on at outside temperaturesabove 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off,or the A/C button is pressed even if the airflow MODE control button is used to select aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The air recirculation mode auto-matically turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control buttons

Press the fan speed control buttons + / –to manually control the fan speed.

Press OFF to turn the system off.

Press the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to prevent fogging in defrost, floor ordef/floor modes.

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

Air flow controlPressing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system offPress the OFF button.


OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor �1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

Rear seat temperature and fan speed can becontrolled from both the front seat overhead con-sole controls �A or the rear seat overhead con-sole controls �B .

Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer controlof the rear climate functions to the rear passen-gers.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the enginemust be running.

If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the airconditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fanspeed positions, air is discharged from the rearvents at the corresponding speed.

LIC0836 LHA0863

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER


1. Rear fan speed control dial2. Rear airflow mode buttons3. Rear temperature control dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dialThe fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on andoff and controls fan speed.

Airflow mode buttonsThe airflow mode buttons select where the airflow is directed from.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows rear passen-gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

LHA0861 WHA1129

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER


RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF(power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen tothe radio with the engine not running, the ignitionswitch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM


SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the first timeor the battery has been replaced, the satelliteradio may not work properly. This is not a mal-function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orlarge building for satellite radio to receive all ofthe necessary data.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM�* satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception.

* XM� is a registered trademark of XM SatelliteRadio, Inc.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099


● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)CD).

CompactFlash� (CF) player (if soequipped)

● Do not force a CF card into the slot. Thiscould damage the CF card and/or player.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the playermay malfunction due to the humidity. If thisoccurs, remove the CF card and dehumidifyor ventilate the player completely.

● The CF player sometimes cannot functionwhen the passenger compartment tempera-ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-perature before use.

● Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight.

● Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly.

Compact disc (CD)/CompactFlash�(CF) with MP3 or WMA (if soequipped)

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD/CF can reduce the filesize by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling:44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually noperceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres-sion removes the redundant and irrelevantparts of a sound signal that the human eardoesn’t hear.


● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Micro-soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, album title,encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.ID3 tag information is displayed on theAlbum/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows� and Windows Media� are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks of the Micro-soft Corporation in the United States of Americaand/or other countries.

CompactFlash� is a registered trademark of theSanDisk� Corporation in the United States ofAmerica and/or other countries.

Playback order chartWHA1078


Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD/CF with MP3 orWMA files is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF

Supported file systemsCD, CD-R, CD-RW:ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.CompactFlash card: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Supportedversions*1

MP3Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHzBit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

Tag informationID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Without navigation system:Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitationWith navigation system: 128 charactersWithout navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*301: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3/WMA writing applica-tions or other text editing applications.Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music startsplaying.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, theplayer will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.


1. RADIO AM·FM button*2. PRESET A·B·C button3. RPT button4. speaker control button5. RDM button6. PAUSE·MUTE button

7. REAR CTRL button8. SCAN button9. TRACK button10. SEEK/CAT button11. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob12. CD load button

13. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons14. CD eject button15. VOL/ON·OFF control knob16. DISC·AUX button

LHA0944


*When the RADIO AM·FM button ispressed, the satellite radio mode will beskipped unless an optional satellite re-ceiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscriptionis active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operationVOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and then push the VOL/ON·OFF controlknob while the system is off to call up the mode(radio or CD) which was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-ance and Fade):

Push the AUDIO control knob to change themode as follows:

Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, pushthe AUDIO control knob until the desired modeappears in the display. Turn the tuning knob toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Youcan also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade andBalance modes. Fade adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, push the AUDIO control knob re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, pressthe SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” keyusing the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-TER button. The audio settings screen will bedisplayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key, thenpress the ENTER button to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by selecting the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the BACK button.

LHA0927


For information on how to use the NISSAN con-troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”earlier in this section.

Precision phased audio (if so equipped):

To turn on or off the precision phased audio,press the SETTING button. Select the “Audio”key using the NISSAN controller, then press theENTER button, the audio settings screen will bedisplayed. Select the “Precision Phased Audio”key, then press the ENTER button. If the amberindicator light is displayed, the precision phasedaudio is enabled. Pressing the ENTER buttonagain will turn off the precision phased audio, theindicator light will disappear.

When this item is turned on, super high pitchsound and super low pitch sound are empha-sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

While in this screen, you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by selecting the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the BACK button.

For information on how to use the NISSAN con-troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”earlier in this section.

Clock set:

For setting the clock, see “Clock” under the“Control panel buttons – color screen withoutnavigation system” heading earlier in this section.

WHA0941 WHA0928


CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CDcertain text might be able to be displayed (whenCD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD isencoded the following text might be able to bedisplayed by selecting the “Text” key using theNISSAN controller and pressing the ENTER but-ton:

● Folder displays the name of the currentfolder being accessed.

● File displays the name of the file currentlyplaying.

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of thesong name.

● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of thealbum name.

● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of theartist’s name.

● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-rently playing.

● Track displays the name of the song on theCD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not displaywhile playing a regular CD. Press the BACKbutton to exit the CD text display screen.

PAUSE·MUTE button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, press thePAUSE·MUTE button.

Press the PAUSE·MUTE button again to resumethe audio sound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will changethe band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed whilethe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, thesatellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIOAM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc willautomatically be turned off and the last radiostation played will come on.

WHA0946 WHA0947


The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDRknob to the right or left.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or theTRACK button for less than 1.5 secondsto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 5 second periodwill stop scan tuning and the radio will remaintuned to that station. If the SCAN button is notpressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves tothe next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-

rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the button, then pressone of the CD insert (1–6) slots. Insert the com-pact disc into the slot with the label side facingup. The compact disc will be guided automati-cally into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compactdisc.


button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pressthe button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se-lect the loading slot by pressing the CD insertselect button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press andhold the button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded with the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressedwhile a compact disc is playing, the track beingplayed returns to its beginning. Press several

times to skip back through tracks. The compactdisc will go back the number of times the buttonis pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed whilethe compact disc is playing, the next track willstart to play from its beginning. Press severaltimes to skip through tracks. The compact discwill advance the number of times the button ispressed. (When the last track on the compactdisc is skipped through, the first track will beplayed.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Rewind·Fast Forward)

buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)button or the TRACK (fast forward) buttonwhile a compact disc is playing, the compact discwill play while rewinding or fast forwarding. Whenthe button is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turnedoff and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn theTUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward orbackward through available folders.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-pact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRK RPT →ALL DISC RPT

MP3/WMA CD:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDERRPT → 1 TRK RPT → ALL DISC RPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.


1 TRK RPT: The track that is currently playing willbe repeated1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently beingaccessed will be repeated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-pact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → ALL DISC MIX

MP3/WMA CD:

ALL DISC MIX → 1 DISC MIX → 1 FOLDER MIX→ ALL DISC MIX

ALL DISC MIX: All discs loaded will be played ina mixed order.1 DISC MIX: The tracks on the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played in a mixed order.1 FOLDER MIX: The tracks in the folder that iscurrently being accessed will be played in amixed order.

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCAN buttonto preview the first 10 seconds of each track onthe CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button againduring this 10 second period stops the scan andthe CD remains on that track.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rearseat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRLbutton again to turn the rear seat audio controlleroff. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If thevehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audiocontroller, the display will show “Rear ControlsNot Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-proximately 1.5 seconds to turn on the rear dis-play screen. Rear Display ON will display. Pressand hold the REAR CTRL button again will turnthe rear display screen off. Rear Display OFF willdisplay. If the vehicle is not equipped with a reardisplay screen, the display will show “Rear Con-trols Not Available”.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press the button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on and theheadphones off.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 20 seconds or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while a compactdisc is playing, the compact disc will eject andthe last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.


AUX jack

The AUX jack �1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input, such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the DISC·AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

WHA0948


1. PRESET A·B·C button2. DISC/AUX button3. speaker control button4. REAR CTRL button5. SCAN·RPT button6. TRACK button

7. SEEK/CAT button8. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob9. CompactFlash� insert slot10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons11. CD eject button12. VOL/ON·OFF control knob

13. AM·FM/SAT button*14. MUSIC BOX button

WHA0945


*When the AM·FM/SAT button ispressed, the satellite radio mode will beskipped unless an optional satellite re-ceiver and antenna are installed and anXM� satellite radio service subscriptionis active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if soequipped)

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operationVOL/ON·OFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and then push the VOL/ON·OFF controlknob while the system is off to call up the mode(radio or CD) which was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFFcontrol knob.

Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-ance and Fade):

Push the AUDIO control knob to change themode as follows:

Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, pushthe AUDIO control knob until the desired modeappears in the display. Turn the tuning knob toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. Youcan also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade andBalance modes. Fade adjusts the sound levelbetween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, push the AUDIO control knob re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF (0) to 5,press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-dio” key and the audio settings screen will bedisplayed. Touch the “–”key or “+”key, to changethe SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by touching the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, touch the “BACK” key.

LHA0884


Precision phased audio (if so equipped):

To turn on or off the precision phased audio,press the SETTING button. Then touch the “Au-dio” key; the audio settings screen will be dis-played. Touch the “Precision Phased Audio ON”key. If the amber indicator light is displayed, theprecision phased audio is enabled. Touching the“Precision Phased Audio ON” key again will turnoff the precision phased audio; the indicator lightwill disappear.

When this item is turned on, super high pitchsound and super low pitch sound are empha-sized and midrange sound is played naturally.

While in this screen, you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by touching the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, touch the “BACK” key.

Clock set:

For setting the clock, see “Clock” under the“Control panel buttons – color screen withoutnavigation system” heading earlier in this section.

LHA0900 WHA0942


CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CDcertain text might be able to be displayed (whenCD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD isencoded the following text might be able to bedisplayed by touching the “Text” key:






● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-rently playing.

● Track displays the name of the song on theCD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not displaywhile playing a regular CD. Press the BACKbutton to exit the CD text display screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO AM·FM button will changethe band as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed whilethe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the RADIO AM·FM button is pressed, thesatellite radio mode will be skipped unless anoptional satellite receiver and antenna are in-stalled and an XM� satellite radio service sub-scription is active. Satellite radio is not availablein Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIOAM·FM button is pressed, the compact disc willautomatically be turned off and the last radiostation played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

WHA0949 WHA0950


TUNE/FLDR (Tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDRknob to the right or left.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or theTRACK button for less than 1.5 secondsto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN·RPT (SCAN tuning) button:

Press the SCAN·RPT button to initiate scan tun-ing. Scan tuning will stop at each broadcastingstation for 5 seconds. Press the SCAN·RPT but-ton again during this 5 second period to stopscan tuning; the radio will remain tuned to thatstation. If the SCAN·RPT button is not pressedwithin 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the nextstation.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side facing up. The compact discwill be guided automatically into the slot and startplaying.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compactdisc.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.


SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressedwhile a compact disc is playing, the track beingplayed returns to its beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back through tracks. The compactdisc will go back the number of times the buttonis pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed whilethe compact disc is playing, the next track willstart to play from its beginning. Press severaltimes to skip through tracks. The compact discwill advance the number of times the button ispressed. (When the last track on the compactdisc is skipped through, the first track will beplayed.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Rewind·Fast Forward)

buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)button or the TRACK (fast forward) buttonwhile a compact disc is playing; the compact discwill play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio play-ing, the tape or radio will automatically be turnedoff and the compact disc will start to play.

TUNE FLDR (Folder) knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn theTUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward orbackward through available folders.

SCAN·RPT (random and repeat) button:

When the SCAN·RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RPT → 1 TRK RPT → 1 DISC RDM → 1DISC RPT

MP3/WMA CD:

1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT →1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → 1 DISC RPT

1 DISC RPT: the entire disc will be repeated.

1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will berepeated.1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played randomly.1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-cessed will be repeated.1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folderbeing accessed will be played randomly.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rearseat audio controller on. Rear Controls UN-LOCKED will display. Pressing the REAR CTRLbutton again will turn the rear seat audio control-ler off. Rear Controls LOCKED will display. If thevehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audiocontroller, the display will show “Rear ControlsNot Available”.

Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap-proximately 1.5 seconds to turn the rear displayscreen on. Rear Display ON will display. Pressand hold the REAR CTRL button again to turn therear display screen off. Rear Display OFF willdisplay. If the vehicle is not equipped with a reardisplay screen, the display will show “Rear Con-trols Not Available”.



Press the button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on and theheadphones off.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the compact discwill eject and the system will turn off.

AUX jack

The AUX jack �1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input, such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player or alaptop computer.

Press the DISC/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

COMPACTFLASH� (CF) PLAYEROPERATION (if so equipped)

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and insert a CF card �1 into the Com-pactFlash� player slot �2 . Then press theDISC/AUX button repeatedly to switch to theCompactFlash� mode.

If the system has been turned off while the Com-pactFlash� card was playing, pressing theVOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the Com-pactFlash� card.

WHA0948 LHA0952


DISC/AUX button:When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the CF card inserted, the systemwill turn on. If another audio source is playing anda CF card is inserted, press the DISC/AUX but-ton repeatedly until the center display changes tothe CompactFlash� mode.

CF display mode

While listening to CF certain text might be able tobe displayed.

Depending on how the files are encoded on theCF the following text might be able to be dis-played by touching the “Text” key:






Press the BACK button to exit the CF text displayscreen.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while the CFcard is playing to return to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press the TRACK buttonwhile the CF card is playing to skip to the begin-ning of the next track.

WHA0953 WHA0954


If you press and hold the SEEK/CAT (re-wind) button or the TRACK (fast forward)button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds,the CF card will play while rewinding or fastforwarding. When the SEEK/CAT (rewind)button or the TRACK (fast forward) buttonis released, the CF card will return to the normalplaying speed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks when the CF card is being played.

For more information on how to use the NISSANcontroller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-ler” earlier in this section.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the CF card either:

● Turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left.

● Touch the desired folder key on screen.

● Use the NISSAN controller.

SCAN·RPT button:Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while the CFcard is playing changes the play pattern as fol-lows:

1 CF CARD RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRKRPT → 1 CF CARD RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM →1 CF CARD RPT

1 CF CARD RPT: the entire CF card will berepeated.1 FOLDER RPT: the folder currently being ac-cessed will be repeated.1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will berepeated.1 CF CARD RDM: all the tracks on the CF cardwill be played randomly.1 FOLDER RDM: the tracks in the current folderbeing accessed will be played randomly.

CF eject:

Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CFcard is inserted to eject the CF card.

Troubleshooting messages:

The following messages will be displayed undercertain conditions:

● Reading CompactFlash�The system is reading the CF card insertedin the slot.

● No CompactFlash� cardA CF card is not inserted in the slot.

● CompactFlash� read errorThe system cannot read the CF card.

● Unplayable fileThe system cannot play a music file.

● No audio fileThe CF card inserted in the slot or its folderdoes not contain any music files.

Compatibility with other media:

If a commercially available CompactFlash�adapter is inserted into the slot, other memorymedia can also be used.

MUSIC BOX� (if so equipped)

The Music Box system can store songs from CDsbeing played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte(GB) storage capacity.

The following CDs can be recorded in the MusicBox system:

● CDs without MP3/WMA files.

● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (HybridCD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.

● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-fication in CD-Extras.

● First session of multisession disc.

Extreme temperature conditions [below �4°F(�20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affectthe performance of the hard-disk.


NOTE:

If the hard drive needs to be replaced dueto a malfunction, all stored music data willbe erased.

Recording CDs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.For information on playing CDs, see “Com-pact Disc (CD) player operation” earlier inthis section.

2. Touch the “REC” key. REC CD appears onthe screen.

NOTE:

● The system starts playing and recording the1st track on the CD when the “REC” key isselected.

● Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-lected to be recorded to the Music Box.

● The skip, fast forward and rewind featuresare disabled while the CD is recording.

● The recording process can be stopped atany time. All tracks that were played beforethe CD was stopped are stored.

● Individual tracks can be deleted from thehard drive after the CD is recorded.

● The system records faster than it plays.

WHA0955 WHA0956


If the title information of the track being recordedis stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, thetitle is automatically displayed on the screen. Fortitle acquisition from the hard-disk drive, musicrecognition technology and related data are pro-vided by Gracenote�.

To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”key on the screen or use the NISSAN controllerand press the ENTER button. The track name andalbum title are displayed on the screen.

If a track is not recorded successfully due toskipping sounds, the symbol is displayedbehind the track number.

The Music Box audio system cannot performrecording under the following conditions:

● There is not enough space in the hard drive.

● The number of albums reaches the maximumof 500.

● The number of tracks reaches the maximumof 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned toON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. Formore information, see “Music Box settings” in thissection.

Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, touch the “STOP” key onthe screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio systemis turned off or the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position, the recording also stops.

Playing recorded songsSelect the Music Box audio system by using oneof the following methods:

● Press the mode select switch on the steer-ing wheel.For information, see “Steering wheel switchfor audio control” later in this section.

● Press the MUSIC BOX button.

● Give voice commands.For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-nition system” in this section.

WHA0957


Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

● Another mode (radio, CD, CompactFlash�or AUX) is selected.

● The audio system is turned off.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a trackis playing to return to the beginning of the currenttrack. Press the TRACK button while atrack is playing to skip to the beginning of the nexttrack.

If you press and hold the SEEK/CAT (re-wind) button or the TRACK (fast forward)button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds;the track will play while rewinding or fast forward-ing. When the SEEK/CAT (rewind) buttonor the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-leased, the track will return to the normal playingspeed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-lect tracks.

For more information on how to use the NISSANcontroller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-ler” earlier in this section.

Play mode selection:

To change to another album or artist, turn theTUNE/FLDR knob.

SCAN·RPT button:

Pressing the SCAN·RPT button while a track isplaying changes the play pattern as follows:

ALL Playlist RPT → 1 Playlist RPT → 1 TRK RPT→ ALL Playlist RDM → 1 Playlist RDM → ALLPlaylist RPT

ALL Playlist RPT: the entire playlist will be re-peated.1 Playlist RPT: the playlist currently being playedwill be repeated.1 TRK RPT: the current track playing will berepeated.ALL Playlist RDM: all the tracks in the playlist willbe played randomly.1 Playlist RDM: the tracks in the current playlistwill be played randomly.

Music Box menu

There are some options available during play-back. Touch the “Menu” key, then select one ofthe following that are displayed on the screen, ifnecessary. Refer to the following information foreach item:

● Play by ArtistPlays songs by an artist whose music iscurrently being played. The artists are sortedin alphabetical order.

● Play by AlbumPlays tracks in each album. The albums aresorted in alphabetical order.

LHA0958


● Play by DatePlays tracks in each album. The albums aresorted in order of the date when they werestored in the system.

● Play by MoodPlays music from one of the followingmoods:

– Relaxing Music

– Lively Music

– Slow Music

– Upbeat Music

● Play by CategoryPlays music from one of the following cat-egories:

– My Favorites

– Hit Songs

– Kids’ Songs

– Rarely Played

● Search ArtistsDisplays a list of artists in alphabetical order.Selecting an artist displays all of the tracksby the artist and starts playing the first track.

● Search AlbumsDisplays a list of albums in order of the datewhen they were stored in the system. Se-lecting an album displays all of the tracks onthe album and starts playing the first track.Touch the “Sort” key to re-sort albums in oneof the following order:

– Rec. (Recorded) Date

– Name

– Release Year

– Artist

WHA1206 LHA0960


● Search Song DetailsSet the conditions and touch the “StartSong Search” key to search for a desiredsong that is stored in the system. The con-ditions are as follows:

– Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal and Fast)

– Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s, ’10sand After)

– Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,Group and Duo)

– Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listen-ing, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Re-ligious, World, Classical, Children’s andOther)

● Search KeywordsInput a search keyword using the keypaddisplayed on the screen.For information, see “How to use the touchscreen” earlier in this section.

● Edit AlbumsSelect a category (Rec. (Recorded) Date,Name, Released Year and Artist) and editthe details using the keypad displayed onthe screen.For information, see “How to use the touchscreen” earlier in this section.

● Music Box System Info.Displays the following information about theMusic Box audio system:

– Music Box Used / Free SpaceInformation about Saved Albums, SavedTracks and Remaining Time is displayed.

– Mood CategoriesNumber of saved tracks and their catego-ries (Relaxing Music, Lively Music, SlowMusic, Upbeat Music and Others) aredisplayed.

– Deleted ItemsInformation about the deleted tracks isdisplayed.

– Search Missing TitlesIf titles are not displayed for CDs thathave been recorded, titles can be ac-quired using one of the following meth-ods:

● Retrieve from HDDSearches the title using the database inthe hard drive.

● Retrieve from CFSearches the title from the informationacquired on the Internet.

● Transfer Missing Titles to CFTransfers the information of the album re-corded without titles to a CompactFlash�card. Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/for details.

– Music Box SettingsFor information, see “Music Box settings”later in this section.

– CDDB VersionThe version of the built-in Gracenote�Database is displayed.


Music Box text display:

While listening to a track in the Music Box audiosystem you can view certain text. Touch the “Text”key to display the following information for eachitem:

● Set MoodSet the mood category of the track to “Re-laxing Music”, “Lively Music”, “Slow Music”or “Upbeat Music”.

● Delete TrackDelete the track being played.

● Edit Info.Edit the name of the track being played andits artist using the keypad displayed on thescreen.For information, see “How to use the touchscreen” earlier in this section.The category of the track can also be set toRock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, Hip Hop,Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk, Blues,Country, Metal, Easy Listening, New Age,Soundtrack, Gospel & Religious, World,Classical, Children’s and Others.

● Remove TrackReset the mood setting of a track.

Restoring deleted dataDeleted music data can be restored by perform-ing the following:

1. Touch the “Menu”key and then the touch the“Music Box System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the“Album/Track” key.

3. Touch the “Restore Album/Track” key to re-store the deleted music data.

LHA0961 LHA0962


You can also listen to the beginning of each trackthat has been deleted by performing the follow-ing:

1. Touch the “Menu” key and then the “MusicBox System Info.” key on the screen.

2. Touch the “Deleted Items” key and then the“Play Sample” key.

Music Box settings

To set up the Music Box system to your preferredsettings, touch the “Menu” key during playback,then touch the “Music Box System Info.” key, andthen the “Music Box Settings” key.

● Automatic Recording:When this item is turned to ON, the MusicBox system automatically starts recordingwhen a CD is inserted.

● Recording Quality:Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

LHA0964 LHA0965 LHA0962


● Title Text Priority:Set the priority to CDDB (Compact DiscData Base) to acquire track information fromthe Gracenote� Database or set to CDTEXT to acquire the information from CDs.

● Delete ALL Music Box Data:Delete all music data stored on the hard-disk.

Gracenote�

NOTE:

● The information contained in theGracenote� Database is not fully guaran-teed.

● The service of the Gracenote� Database onthe Internet may be stopped without priornotice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote� MusicID™ Terms of Use

This device contains software from Gracenote,Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). Thesoftware from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-ware”) enables this application to do online discidentification and obtain music-related informa-tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-tions. You may use Gracenote Data only bymeans of the intended End-User functions of thisdevice.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers foryour own personal non-commercial use only. Youagree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Software or any Gracenote Data toany third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTESERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-TED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to usethe Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-late these restrictions. If your license terminates,you agree to cease any and all use of theGracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, andthe Gracenote Servers, including all ownershiprights. Under no circumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment to you for anyinformation that you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries for statistical purposes.The purpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-vice to count queries without knowing anythingabout who you are. For more information, see the

LHA0963


web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote MusicID Service.

The Gracenote Software and each item ofGracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”Gracenote makes no representations or warran-ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracyof any Gracenote Data from in the GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves the right to deletedata from the Gracenote Servers or to changedata categories for any cause that Gracenotedeems sufficient. No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated to provide you withnew enhanced or additional data types or cat-egories that Gracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its online services atany time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESEXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOURUSE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASEWILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.

Copyright:

Music recognition technology and related dataare provided by Gracenote�. Gracenote is theindustry standard in music recognition technol-ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-mation visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.This product and service may practice one ormore of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-ing. Some services supplied under license fromOpen Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarksof Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-marks of Gracenote.

CD/CF (CompactFlash�) CARE ANDCLEANING

CD:

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

LHA0049


● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

CF cards:

CAUTION

Do not force the CompactFlash� card intothe CompactFlash� player slot. Forcingthe CF card could damage the pins insidethe CF player slot, especially if the CF cardis upside down or backwards.

● Never touch the terminal portion of the Com-pactFlash� cards. Do not bend the cards.

● Always place the cards in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● Do not place heavy objects on the cards.

● Do not store the cards in highly humid loca-tions.

● Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight.

● Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

Refer to the CompactFlash� card Owner’sManual for more details.

LHA1002


1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

1. Volume control switch2. Phone operation switch3. POWER on and MODE select switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

If you have the Type A switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe POWER switch to turn the audio system onor off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE-SET B → PRESET C → Music Box** (if soequipped) → CD* → CompactFlash�* (if soequipped) → DVD* (if so equipped) → AUX***.

*These modes are only available when compat-ible media storage is inserted into the device.

**This mode is only available when music hasbeen downloaded into the Music Box hard-diskdrive audio system.

***This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Type AWHA0611

Type BWHA0612


Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD/CF):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-tween selections. If there is a blank interval within1 program or there is no interval between pro-grams, the system may not stop in the desired orexpected location.

Next/Previous track (Music Box):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Push and hold the tuning switch orfor more than 1.5 seconds to change playlists.When the last playlist is playing, the next playlistwill be selected.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc upor down.


1. VOL (volume) control button2. MODE select button3. speaker control button4. NEXT button5. SEEK button6. Headphone jacks

7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*

*Red transmitters will be visible wheninfrared headphones are on.

REAR AUDIO CONTROLS

One or two infrared headphones are included ifthe vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain-ment system. Most portable radio headphoneswork with the rear audio controls.

VOL (volume) button:


Press this button to turn the rear speakersoff and headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on andheadphones off.

MODE button:

The MODE button allows the rear passengers tochange between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX.The media options are listed on the face plate ofthe rear audio controls. When a source of mediais selected, the media label will be illuminated.

SEEK button:

In AM or FM mode, the SEEK button allows therear seat passengers to find the next radio stationup or down the station band frequency.

In CD mode, the SEEK button allows the rearpassengers to find the next or previous selectionon the CD.

LHA0322


NEXT button:

When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM orFM mode, the radio will change to the next preset.

The NEXT button does not function while in SATradio mode or when playing a DVD or CD.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearpassenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear driver or passenger side windowglass or attach any metal parts to it. Thismay cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the reardriver or passenger side window, becareful not to scratch or damage thewindow antenna. Lightly wipe along theantenna with a dampened soft cloth.

This vehicle is equipped with the mobile enter-tainment system, which enables you to play aDigital Versatile Disc (DVD), providing the im-ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis-play screens.

WARNING

● The driver must not attempt to operateor view the Mobile Entertainment Sys-tem while the vehicle is in motion sothat full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

● Do not attempt to modify the system todisplay a movie on the front screenwhile the vehicle is being driven. Doingso may distract the driver and maycause a collision and serious personalinjury or death.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass screen breaks,do not touch it. Doing so could result inan injury.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe Mobile Entertainment System com-ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-ing solutions.

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)].

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do notoperate the system more than 15 minutes withoutstarting the engine.

WHA0966

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)


Movies will not be shown on the front displaywhile the vehicle is in any drive position to reducedriver distraction. Audio is available when a movieis played. To view movies in the front display, stopthe vehicle in a safe location, move the shiftselector to the P (Park) position and apply theparking brake.

1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. Auxiliary input jacksDIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLS

1. EJECT button:When the button is pressed with theDVD loaded, it will be ejected.The display will show the eject symbol in theupper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the button is pressed.If the DVD is not loaded, the display willshow “NO DISC”.If the DVD comes out and is not removed

within 25 seconds, it will be pulled back intothe slot to protect it.

2. DVD slot:Insert a DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automati-cally into the slot.

3. Auxiliary input jack:For information, see “DVD auxiliary inputjacks” later in this section.

WHA0967


1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-

OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROLRefer to “Remote control operation” later in thissection for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREENThe flip-down screen has a wireless remote controlreceiver �1 located at the bottom of the screen.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystal dis-play may break if hit with a hard or sharpobject. If the glass screen breaks, do nottouch it. Doing so could result in an injury.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

LHA0317

LHA0315


Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Press the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power supply turned off whennot in use.

NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-mance, increase the volume on the rearseat controller to the maximum level andadjust the infrared headphone volume us-ing the volume control on the headphones.Using a lower volume setting on the rearseat controller can cause static noise in theinfrared headphones.

BEFORE OPERATING THE DVDMOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-ment system.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate theDVD System or wear the headphoneswhile the vehicle is in motion so that fullattention may be given to vehicleoperation.

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD playerdoes not guarantee complete functionality of allVIDEO-CD formats.

SAA0720 SAA0721


Copyright and trademark

● The technology protected by the U.S. patentand other intellectual property rights ownedby Macrovision Corporation and other rightholders is adopted for this system.

● This copyright protected technology cannotbe used without a permit from MacrovisionCorporation. It is limited to be personal use,etc., as long as the permit from MacrovisionCorporation is not issued.

● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

● Dolby digital is manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

● Dolby and the double D mark are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

● DTS and DTS Digital Surround are regis-tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,Inc.

Parental level (parental control)

DVDs with the parental control setting can beplayed with this system. Please use your ownjudgement to set the parental control with thesystem.

Disc selectionYou can play the following disc formats with theDVD drive:

● DVD-VIDEO

● VIDEO-CD

● CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) (CDwith MP3/WMA cannot be played.)

Use DVDs with a region code 1; DVDs withregion code ALL or 1 will operate in the DVDentertainment system. The region code is dis-played as a small symbol printed on the top of theDVD. This vehicle-installed DVD player cannotplay DVDs with a region code other than 1 orALL. Display settings

Front display:

To adjust the front display mode, press the SET-TING button while the DVD is being played,select the “Display”key with the NISSAN control-ler, and then press the ENTER button. To adjustthe display ON/OFF, brightness, tint, color, con-trast and black level, select each key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.Then you can adjust each item using the NISSANcontroller. After changes have been made pressthe BACK button to save the settings.

WHA0968


Rear display:

To adjust the rear display mode, press the DISP(Display) button on the remote controller.

To adjust the display brightness, tint, color andcontrast, select each key using the joystick on theremote controller and tilt the joystick to the rightor left.

Press the BACK button to apply the settings andreturn to the previous display.

PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILEDISC (DVD)With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the DISC/AUX button located on the frontcontrols to hear the sound of the DVD playthrough the speakers.

Press the REAR CTRL button located on thefront controls to disable or enable rear seat audiocontrols. For more information on rear seat audiocontrols see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in thissection.

Pressing the button on the front controlsturns the rear speakers on or off and enables ordisables the wireless headphones .

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

DISC/AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location andapply the parking brake for the front seatoccupants to operate the DVD drive whilewatching the images.

Press the DISC/AUX button on the instrumentpanel and turn the display to the DVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-matically.

The operation screen will be turned on when theDISC/AUX button located on the instrumentpanel is pressed while a DVD is being played,and it will turn off automatically after a period oftime. To turn it on again, press the DISC/AUXbutton once more.

LHA0972


DVD operation keys

To operate the DVD drive, touch the preferred key(if so equipped) or select the preferred key dis-played on the operation screen using theNISSAN controller.

NOTE:

If the display in your vehicle is not touchscreen enabled; use the NISSAN controllerand the ENTER button to operate the fol-lowing functions. For more information onhow to operate the NISSAN controller, see“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlierin this section.

PAUSE key:

Touch the “ ” PAUSE key to pause the DVD.To resume playing the DVD, touch the“ ”PLAY key.

To pause the DVD, it is also possible to pressthe button on the keypad of the remotecontroller.

PLAY key:

Touch the “ ” PLAY key to start playing theDVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.

To start playing the DVD, it is also possible topress the button on the keypad of theremote controller.

STOP key:

Touch the “ ” STOP key to stop playing theDVD.

To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible topress the button on the keypad of theremote controller.

SKIP (forward) key:

Touch the “ ” SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)of the disc forward. The chapters will advance thenumber of times the “ ” SKIP key is touched.

Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for morethan 1.5 seconds to fast forward the disc. Whenthe “ ” SKIP key is released, the disc will beplayed normally.

To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possibleto press the button on the keypad of theremote controller.

SKIP (rewind) key:

Touch the “ ”SKIP key to skip the chapter(s)of the disc backward. The chapters will go backthe number of times the “ ” SKIP key istouched.

Touch and hold the “ ” SKIP key for morethan 1.5 seconds to rewind the disc. When the“ ” SKIP key is released, the disc will beplayed normally.

To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also pos-sible to press the button on the keypad ofthe remote controller.


DVD settings

Touch the “Settings” key to adjust the followingsettings while playing a DVD.

When all the changes have been made, pressBACK button to save all the settings.

NOTE:

If the display in your vehicle is not touchscreen enabled; use the NISSAN controllerand the ENTER button to operate the fol-lowing functions. For more information onhow to operate the NISSAN controller see,“How to use the NISSAN controller” earlierin this section.

Switch to DVD-AUX:

Switch the output source from the DVD drive toanother device connected to the auxiliary inputjacks located on the DVD player.

For more information, see “DVD auxiliary inputjacks” later in this section.

Menu:

Some menus specific to each DVD will beshown. For details, see the instructions attachedto the DVD.

Top Menu:

Each title menu in the disc will be shown. Fordetails, see the instructions attached to the DVD.

LHA0969 LHA0970 LHA0971


Audio:

Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will beshown. For details, see the instructions attachedto the DVD.

Subtitle:

Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by

touching the “ ” key or the “ ” key.

Display Mode:

Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cinema

mode by touching the “ ” key or the “ ”key.

Angle:

If the DVD contains different angles (such asmoving images), the current image angle can beswitched to another one.

Choose a different angle by touching the “–” keyor the “+” key; the angle will change if available.

Angle Mark:

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will beshown on the bottom of the screen if the scenecan be seen from a different angle. Touch the“ON” key to enable the angle mark; the indicatorlight will illuminate.

10Key Search:

Touch the “10Key Search” key to open the num-ber entry screen. Input the number you want tosearch for and touch the “OK” key. The specifiedTitle/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Title Search:

The scene with the specified title will be dis-played the number of times the “–” key or the “+”key is touched.

Menu Skip:

DVD menus are automatically configured and thecontents will be played directly when the “MenuSkip” key is turned on. Note that some discs maynot be played directly even if this item is turnedon.

DVD Language:

Touch the “DVD Language” key to open the num-ber entry screen. Input the number correspond-ing to the preferred language and touch the “OK”key. The DVD top menu language will bechanged to the one specified.

DRC:

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows youto tune the dynamic range of the sound recordedin the Dolby� Digital format. Touch the “–” key orthe “+” key to tune the DRC.

DVD auxiliary input jacksThe auxiliary input jacks are located on the front ofthe DVD player, which is located inside the cen-ter console. NTSC and PAL compatible devicessuch as video games, camcorders and portablevideo players can be connected to the auxiliaryjacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, power offthe portable device and turn off the DVD player.

To view something connected to the auxiliaryinput jacks, press the DISC/AUX button until theDVD mode appears, then select the “Settings”key using the NISSAN controller and press theENTER button. Then select the “Switch to DVD-AUX” key using the NISSAN controller and pressthe ENTER button. The screen will change to theDVD-AUX mode.


DVD-AUX settings

Select the “Settings” key using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button to adjust thefollowing settings:

● Switch to DVD:Select this key to switch back to the DVDmode.

● Video Format:If the auxiliary source is in a different video

format, select the “ ” key or the “ ”key using the NISSAN controller and pressthe ENTER button and the video format willchange.

● Display Mode:Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cin-ema mode by selecting the “ ” key orthe “ ” key using the NISSAN controllerand press the ENTER button.

When all the changes have been made, press theBACK button to save all the settings.

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION

For all operation precautions, see “Before oper-ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System”earlier in this section.

The DVD system can also be controlled by usingthe remote controller in the rear seats. See thefollowing items.

PWR on/off button:

With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ONposition, press the PWR button to turn the DVDrear display on or off.

NOTE:

The PWR button on the remote control onlyturns the rear display on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jackson the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

LHA0973 LHA0974


The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

PLAY:

When the PLAY button on the remotecontrol is pressed, the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

Press the (fast forward) / (rewind)buttons to carry out the fast forward or rewindpresentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Press the (fast forward) / (rewind)buttons again or PLAY button to resume thenormal play speed.

NEXT

CHAPTER/PREVIOUS

CHAPTER:

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispressed while the DVD is playing, the program

next to the present one will start to play from itsbeginning. Press several times to skip throughprograms. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pressed. When the(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, theprogram being played returns to its beginning.Press several times to skip back through pro-grams. The DVD will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

PAUSE:

When the PAUSE button on the remotecontrol is pressed, the player will pause playing ofthe media. In pause mode, the player willshow on the upper left corner of the dis-play until the player is changed to another mode.

STOP:

Press the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAYbutton is pressed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect,it will ignore the last stored disc position and

upon receipt of the next play message, will beginat the Title Menu or at “the beginning of the disc”.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigatewithin the display menu and use ENTER toselect the item.

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-lect MENU items.

In the display menu, press the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.


MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear onthe screen. Use the Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu and use ENTER to select theitem.

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.

TITLE:

Press the TITLE button to return the DVD mediato the “title” of the DVD.

Press the TITLE button again to return to theprevious stop point and play.

BACK:

Press the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE:

Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO:

Press the AUDIO button to call up the audiomenu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE:

Press the ANGLE button to call up the cameraangle menu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR:

Press the CLEAR button to clear all numericinputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10):

Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.

Use the “≥10” button to input numbers greaterthan or equal to 10. Up to 3 digits can be inputtedwhen selecting the chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.

CARE AND MAINTENANCEUse a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your NISSAN Mobile EntertainmentSystem (DVD player face, screen, remote control,etc.).

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)].

Do not attempt to operate the system in extremehumidity conditions (less than 10% or more than75%).

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.


HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVDs as they maycause the DVD player to malfunction:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.

LHA0049

LHA0484


● DVDs with a region code other than“1”. The region code �A is displayed ina small symbol printed on the top ofthe DVD �B .

● DVDs that are not round.

● DVDs with a paper label.

● DVDs that are warped, scratched, orhave unequal edges.

● Recordable digital video discs(DVD+R).

● Rewritable digital video discs(DVD+RW).

If a DVD with a paper label is used andbecomes jammed, you may be able to resetthe unit and eject the jammed disc with thefollowing procedure:

1. Record the radio presets.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal fromthe battery for five minutes.

3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-nal.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD hasbeen ejected. If it has not, try to ejectthe DVD by pushing the eject button.

5. If the disc cannot be ejected see yourNISSAN dealer for further assistance.

6. Re-program the radio presets.

Remote control and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

LHA0318


If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedfor any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit theuse of cellular telephones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

SAA0723

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable voltage con-trol system and the vehicle battery maynot charge completely. Refer to “Vari-able voltage control system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion later in this manual.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is placed in theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acompatible cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module before using the hands-freephone system.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

WHA0975


– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEMThe NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the Bluetooth� PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. If the button ispressed before the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phone systemnot ready” and will not react to voice commands.


Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.

● To speed the operation you can say multiplecommands. For example, press thebutton then say “Phonebook, New entry”rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voicefeedback prompt then say “New entry”.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.


● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Call International”command and the “Send” command duringa call).

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Call International” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”at any time in any position of the phonenumber (available only when using “Call In-ternational” command).

See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-tional” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

WHA0976


PHONE/END

Press the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTEDThe following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the Bluetooth� Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press

(PHONE/SEND)to select

Press

(PHONE/END)to select

English Spanish FrenchSpanish English FrenchFrench English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” �A

“Pair phone” �B

“New phone” �C

Initiate from handset �D

Name phone �E

Assign priority �F

Choose ringtone �G

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” �B . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.


4. Say: “New phone” �C . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset �D .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone �E .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level�F . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetooth� phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system or

refer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone �G . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” �A

Number (speak digits) �B

“Dial” �C

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

3. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format �B . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three fivefour” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say “In-ternational”. See “How to say numbers” inthis section, for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” �C . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.


LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

“Phone Book”

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

Name (speak name) �A


“Redial” �C

“Call Back” �D

Name (speak name) �A

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”in this section for more details.

“Redial” �C

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.


“Call back” �D

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, please say “international”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#” duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry” �A

“Edit” �B

“Delete” �C

“List Names” �D

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.


NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” �A

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.

“Edit” �B

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.


The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” �C

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.

To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” �D

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” �A

“Play” �B

“Delete” �C

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Record” �A

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.

“Play” �B

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” �C

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.


“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” �A

“List Phone” �B

“Select Phone” �C

“Change Priority” �D

“Delete Phone” �E

“Select Ringtone” �F

“Bluetooth Off” �G

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” �A

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat-ible phone to the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” in this section for ad-ditional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing proce-dure” in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” in thissection.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” �B

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.

“Select phone” �C

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position or you select a newphone.

“Change priority” �D

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired Bluetooth�phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C


and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” �E

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” �F

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone andasks if you would like to select that tone. If yousay “No”, the system plays the next ringtoneavailable and continues to cycle through theringtones until you select one or quit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” �G

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODESpeaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.

Training procedureThe procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.


6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register your name.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes

● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” in this section.2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA0977

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)


module when the ignition switch is turned to theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports thephone commands, so dialing a phone numberusing your voice is possible. For more details, see“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-tion.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive cellular signal; such asin a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Immediately after the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROMfor the navigation system is inserted into theplayer, it may be impossible to receive a callfor a short period of time.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

● The signal strength display on the monitorwill not coincide with the signal strengthdisplay of some cellular phones.

● If reception between callers is unclear, ad-justing the incoming or outgoing call volumemay improve the clarity. See “Call volume”later in this section.


REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensedto Xanavi InformaticsCorporation.

VOICE COMMANDSYou can use voice commands to operate variousBluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System featuresusing the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. Formore details, see “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” in this section.

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel or the switch on the steeringwheel, and select the “Pair phone” key onthe display using the NISSAN controller.Then press the ENTER button.

LSU0001


NOTE:

If a phone is already paired with the sys-tem, Step 1 will not work. To pair anotherphone, press the SETTING button, then se-lect the “Phone” key and press the ENTERbutton. Scroll to the bottom of the list andselect the “Bluetooth Setup” key and pressthe ENTER button. Select the “Pair Phone”key, and press the ENTER button then fol-low the instructions in Step 2.

2. Select the “None (Add New)” key from thename list of the phones, and press the EN-TER button.

3. When a PIN code appears on the screen,operate the Bluetooth� cellular phone toenter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phone. Seethe cellular phone Owner’s Manual fordetails. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call theNISSAN Consumer Affairs Department forinstructions on pairing recommended cellu-lar phones.

When the pairing is complete, the screenwill return to the Bluetooth� setup display.

LSU0002 LSU0003


PHONEBOOK

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in thephonebook.

1. Press the SETTING button, then select the“Phone” key and press the ENTER button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key and press theENTER button.

3. Select one of the “None (Add New)” keysfrom the name list of the phonebook andpress the ENTER button.

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth” key inorder to transfer a phonebook entry fromyour cellular phone to your phonebook inyour car.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-son’s name and phone number from thememory of the cellular phone. The memorysending procedure from the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemanufacturer. See the cellular phone own-er’s manual for more details.

6. After the download is registered in thephonebook, the system will ask if you want toadd a voicetag for it. The voicetag screen willbe displayed.

If you want to add a voicetag select the “Yes”key and press the ENTER button. For ex-ample, if the person’s name is David, speak“David” while the Store voicetag screen ison the display. The David voicetag is storedin the phonebook. Voicetag is a useful func-tion for easy dialing supported by the VoiceRecognition system. For more information,see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” inthis section.

LHA0978 LHA0983 LHA0984


7. When the phonebook download is com-pleted, the screen will return to the name listof the phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phonenumber. Select one of the following options forStep 4 above.

Enter Data by Keypad:Input the name and phone number manually us-ing the keypad displayed on the screen. For in-formation on how to use the touch screen, see“How to use the touch screen” earlier in thissection.

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth� cellularphone. The availability of this function dependson each cellular phone. The copying procedurefrom the cellular phone also varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-er’s manual for more details.

Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:Store the name and phone number from theoutgoing call list.

Copy from Incoming Call Logs:Store the name and phone number from theincoming call list.

Transfer via Bluetooth:Transfer a contact from the Bluetooth� cellularphone. Availability of this function depends oneach cellular phone. The transferring procedurefrom the cellular phone also varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellular phone own-er’s manual for more details.

Delete:Delete a contact that is registered in the phone-book.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel or the switch on the steeringwheel. The “Phone” screen will appear onthe display.

2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key on the“Phone” menu and press the ENTER button.

3. Select the registered person’s name fromthe list and press the ENTER button. Dialingwill start and the screen will change to theCall in Progress screen.

LSU0007 LSU0078


4. After the call is over, perform one of thefollowing to finish the call:

a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call inProgress screen and press the ENTERbutton.

b. Press the switch on the steeringwheel.

c. When the Call in Progress screen is dis-played, press the PHONE button on theinstrument panel to hang up. If any otherscreen is currently displayed, press thePHONE button to display the Call in Prog-ress screen first, then press the PHONEbutton again to hang up.

There are different methods to make a call. Selectone of the following options instead of “Call(Phonebook)” in Step 2 above.

● Redial:

Dial the previously dialed number again.

● Call (Call Logs):

Select the name or phone number from theincoming or outgoing call logs.

● Call (Downloaded):

Select the name or phone number from thedownloaded cellular phonebook.

● Dial (Keypad):

Input the phone number manually using thekeypad displayed on the screen. For infor-mation on how to use the touch screen, see“How to use the touch screen” earlier in thissection.

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display willchange to phone mode. To receive a call, followone of the procedures listed below:

a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel.

c. Press the phone button on the steeringwheel switches.

There are some options available when receivinga call. Select one of the following displayed onthe screen.

LHA0987


Answer:Accept an incoming call to talk.

On Hold:Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call:Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedureslisted below:

a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrumentpanel.

c. Press and hold the phone button on thesteering wheel switches. DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.Select one of the following displayed on thescreen, if necessary:

Hang up:Finish the call.

Use Handset:Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:Mute your voice to the person.

Keypad:Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.For example, entering your PIN number for voice-mail.

NOTE:

Pushing the TALK switch on thesteering wheel during a call allows num-bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-ognition.

Cancel Mute:This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.Mute will be cancelled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder orquieter, press the volume control switch locatedon the steering wheel switches or turn the volumecontrol knob on the instrument panel while talkingon the phone. This adjustment is also available inthe SETTING mode.

LHA0988


ENDING A CALL

To finish the call, perform one of the followingprocedures:

● Select the “Hang up” key on the Call inProgress display and press the ENTER but-ton.

● Push the switch on the steeringwheel.

● When the Call in Progress screen is dis-played, press the PHONE button on theinstrument panel to hang up. If any otherscreen is currently displayed, press thePHONE button to display the Call in Prog-ress screen first, then press the PHONEbutton again to hang up.

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem to your preferred settings, press the SET-TING button on the instrument panel and selectthe “Phone” key on the display, then press theENTER button.

Phonebook:See “Phonebook” earlier in this section for add-ing, editing and deleting a contact.

Downloaded Phonebook:See the following information for each item.

LSU0009 LHA0978


● Download All:Download all of the contacts registered inthe Bluetooth� cellular phone. Availability ofthis function depends on each cellularphone. The memory downloading procedurefrom the cellular phone also varies accordingto each cellular phone. See your cellularphone Owner’s Manual for more details.

● Delete Downloaded Phonebook:Delete all of the downloaded phonebookentries.

● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-book:Delete a single entry from the downloadedphonebook. Touch the corresponding letterkey, then touch the name key you wish todelete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete theentry.

Automatic Hold:If this item is turned on, an incoming call will beplaced on hold automatically after several rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that isdifferent from the cellular phone’s will soundwhen receiving a call.

Delete Call Logs:Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs fromthe list.

Bluetooth Setup:See the following information for each item.

● Bluetooth:If this item is turned off, the connection be-tween the cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module will be canceled.

● Bluetooth Info.:Check information about the device name,vehicle name, device address, device PINand connection status.

● Pair Phone:See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.

LHA0979 LHA0980


● Priority ChangeIf multiple phones are registered to the sys-tem, you can change the priority of thephones on the shown list. The system showsthe priority level of each phone. Selectphone to change priority. Then, select an-other phone to swap priority levels.

● Remove Paired Phone:Delete a registered cellular phone from thepaired list.

● Paired Phone List:Up to 5 registered cellular phones areshown on the list. If you select a cellularphone that is different from the one currentlybeing connected, the newly selected phonewill be connected to the system.

● Edit Phone Name:If you would like to change the way yourphone’s name is displayed, select this key; acharacter input screen will be displayed.

CALL VOLUME

Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volumemay improve clarity if reception between callers isunclear.

● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allowsyou to hear a difference in volume.

● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allowsthe person you are talking with to hear adifference in volume.

To access the settings, press the SETTING but-ton, then highlight “Volume and Beeps” using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.

LHA0989 LSU0083


You can also adjust the volume of an incomingvoice during a call by pushing the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or by turning thevolume control knob on the instrument panel.

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-freeoperation of the systems equipped on this ve-hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.

There are two voice recognition modes of opera-tion available. They are:

● Standard Mode

● Alternate Command Mode

In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),commands that are available are always shownon the display and announced by the system. Youcan complete your desired operation by simplyfollowing the prompts given by the system. In thismode, hands-free operation of Audio ClimateControl and Display is not available throughNISSAN Voice Recognition.

For advanced operation, you can change to anAlternate Command Mode that enables the op-eration of the display, audio, and climate controlthrough NISSAN Voice Recognition. When thismode is active, an expanded list of commandscan be spoken after pushing the TALKswitch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-mand menu prompts are turned off.

In Alternate Command Mode the recognitionsuccess rate may be affected because the num-ber of available commands and the ways ofspeaking each command are increased. See“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-mand Mode” later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate whenAlternate Command Mode is active, try using theSpeaker Adaptation Function available in thatmode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” laterin this section. Otherwise, it is recommended thatAlternate Command Mode be turned off andStandard Mode be used for the best recognitionperformance.

For the voice commands for the navigation sys-tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’sManual of your vehicle.

For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default settingis the Standard Mode. See “Standard Mode” inthis section. For vehicles in Canada, the factorydefault setting is the Alternate Command Mode.See “Alternate Command Mode” later in this sec-tion.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)


NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSTANDARD MODEThe Standard Mode enables control of naviga-tion, phone and vehicle information. With thissetting active, commands that are available arealways shown on the display and announced bythe system.

Displaying user guideIf you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition systemfor the first time or you do not know how tooperate it, you can display the User Guide forconfirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands byaccessing a simplified User Guide, which con-tains basic instructions and tutorials for severalvoice commands.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrumentpanel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key usingthe NISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressingthe switch and saying “Help”.

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-ler and press the ENTER button.

Available items:

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate theVoice Recognition system.

WHA1207 WHA1208


● Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for entering a destination by streetaddress.

● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voicecommand operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correctcommand recognition by the system.

● Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available Voice Recognitionsettings.

Getting startedBefore using the Voice Recognition system forthe first time, you can confirm how to use com-mands by viewing the Getting Started section ofthe User Guide.

1. Highlight “Getting Started” and press theENTER button.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen using the NISSAN controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-ognition system

If you choose “Finding a Street Address” or“Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how toperform these operations using Voice Recogni-tion.

LSU0014


Useful tips for correct operationYou can display useful speaking tips to help thesystem recognize your voice commands cor-rectly.

1. Select “Help on Speaking”.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen using the NISSAN controller ortouching the page down key.

Voice recognition settingsThe available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition system are described.

1. Highlight “Voice Recognition Settings” andpress the ENTER button.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling thescreen using the NISSAN controller.

USING THE SYSTEMInitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the system is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe switch is pressed before the initializa-tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-ognition initialization is completed.

BEFORE STARTINGTo get the best recognition performance fromVoice Recognition, observe the following:

● The interior of the vehicle should be as quietas possible. Close the windows to eliminatethe surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent thesystem from correctly recognizing the voicecommands.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand.

● Speak in a natural conversational voice with-out pausing between words.

● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fanspeed is automatically lowered so that yourcommands can be recognized more easily.

LSU0015 LSU0080


GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Press the switch located on thesteering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,and the system announces, “Would you liketo access Phone, Navigation, Information orHelp?”

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speaka command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu promptsand speak after the tone sounds until yourdesired operation is completed.

Operating tips● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the iconis .

● Commands that are available are alwaysshown on the display and spoken throughvoice menu prompts. Commands other thanthose that are displayed are not accepted.Please follow the prompts given by the sys-tem.

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

● Press the switch on the steeringwheel to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressand hold the switch. The message,“Voice cancelled” will be announced.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-tem feedback, push the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or use theaudio system volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

WHA1109 LSU0017


How to speak numbersVoice Recognition requires a certain way tospeak numbers when giving voice commands.Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

● When saying the phone number 800-662-6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are alsosupported.

Examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six twozero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six twozero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone num-bers by saying the phone number in three groupsof numbers. For example, when you try to call800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, andthe system will then ask you for the next threedigits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,the system will then ask for the last four digits.Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method ofphone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-mance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak thenumber “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter“O” is included in the house number, it willnot be recognized as “0” even if you speak“oh” instead of “zero”.


Standard Mode command listCategory Command:

COMMAND ACTIONPhone Displays Phone function commands.Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.Information Displays Vehicle Information.Help Displays User Guide.

Navigation Command:

COMMAND ACTIONAddress Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTIONDial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).Redial Makes a call to the last dialed number.Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

Vehicle Information Command: (if so equipped)

COMMAND ACTIONTraffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off.Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.Trip Computer Displays Trip information.Maintenance Displays Maintenance information.


Voice command examplesSome basic voice command examples are de-scribed here.

For navigation system commands, see the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Example 1 — Placing a call to the phonenumber 800-662-6200:


2. The system announces, “Would you like toaccess Phone, Navigation, Information orHelp?”

3. Say “Phone”.

WHA1109 LSU0017


4. Say “Dial Number”. 5. Say “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the nextthree digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Say “662”.

LSU0018 LSU0019 LSU0020


8. The system announces, “Please say the lastfour digits or say change number.”

9. Say “6200”.

10. The system announces, “Dial or ChangeNumber?”

11. Say “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

NOTE:

● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping isrecommended for improved recognition.See “How to speak numbers” earlier in thissection.

● You can only say a phone number using the3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits usingthis command. Please use the “InternationalCall” command for all other formats, andwhen special characters such as star (*),pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.

● If you say “Change Number” during phonenumber entry, the system will automaticallyrequest that you repeat the number usingthe 3-3-4 format. In this case please say thearea code first and then follow the prompts.

● Do not add a “1” in front of the area codewhen speaking phone numbers.

● If the system does not recognize your com-mand, please try repeating the commandusing a natural voice. Speaking too slowly ortoo loudly may further decrease recognitionperformance.

LSU0021 LSU0022


Example 2 — Placing an international callto the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:


2. The system announces, “Would you like toaccess Phone, Navigation, Information orHelp?”

3. Say “Phone”.

4. Say “International Call”.WHA1109 LSU0017 LSU0018


5. Say “011811112223333”. 6. Say “Dial”.

7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-222-3333.

NOTE:

Any digit input format is available in theInternational Number input process, aswell as the special characters such as star(*), pound (#), and plus (+).

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONALTERNATE COMMAND MODEThe Alternate Command Mode enables controlof the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-tems as well as additional commands for theVehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-tems. With this setting active, the system doesnot announce or display the available commandsat each step.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, anexpanded list of commands can be used afterpushing the TALK switch. Under thismode, the screen for Standard Mode commandsis not available on the display. Please review theexpanded command list, available when thismode is active, as some Standard Mode com-mands are replaced. Please see examples ofAlternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognitionsuccess rate may be affected as the number ofavailable commands and ways of speaking eachcommand are increased. You can turn this modeON or OFF. When this mode is activated, theVoice Recognition Settings will change to showmore options.

LSU0023 LSU0024


Activating Alternate Command Mode1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Highlight the “Others”key on the display andthen press the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key andthen press the ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”key and press the ENTER button.

5. The confirmation message is displayed onthe screen. Select the “OK” key and pressthe ENTER button to activate the AlternateCommand Mode.

6. Alternate Command Mode is activated andthe setting menu is expanded to include theAlternate Command Mode options. See“Settings menu” later in this section for anexplanation of the options.

Displaying the command listIf you are controlling the system by voice com-mands for the first time or do not know theappropriate voice command, perform the follow-ing procedure for displaying the voice commandlist (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

Press the switch, listen for the tone andsay, “Help”. The system will respond by display-ing the command list main menu.

WHA1125 LSU0026 LSU0027


Only manual controls such as the touchscreencan navigate the command list menu.

As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,you may access the command list using the fol-lowing steps:




NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.

4. Highlight the “Command List” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

WHA1126 LSU0028


5. Highlight a category using the NISSAN con-troller and press the ENTER button. Thecommand list for the category selected isshown.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen using theNISSAN controller to view the entire list.

7. Press the BACK button to return to theprevious screen.

WHA1126


Alternate Command Mode command listNavigation Command:

COMMAND ACTIONHome Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.Minimize Freeway Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.Recalculate Recalculates a route to the current destination.Route Information Displays the Route Information Menu.Cancel Route Cancels the current route.Detour Displays a list of distances to detour from the current route.Show Current Location Displays the current location on the Map view.Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.Planview Split Map Changes the Map display to show two 2-dimensional maps using a split screen.Birdview Split Map Changes the Map display to show a 2-dimensional map and Birdview map using a split screen.Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.Zoom In Changes the map scale to a smaller number.Zoom Out Changes the map scale to a larger number.Landmark Icons Shows or hides the points of interests on the displays.Guidance Voice Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.Store Location Stores the current location to the Address Book.


Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTIONRedial Makes a call to the last dialed number.Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook.Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

Audio Command:

COMMAND ACTIONRadio Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.Satellite Radio Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.Music Box Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.CD Starts to play a CD.


Vehicle Information Command:

COMMAND ACTIONTraffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off.Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.Trip Computer Displays Trip information.Maintenance Display Maintenance information.Tire Pressure Displays the Tire Pressure screen.

Climate Control Command:

COMMAND ACTIONClimate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.Climate Control Off Turns the climate control system off.


Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands byaccessing a simplified User Guide, which con-tains basic instructions and tutorials for severalvoice commands.




4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using theNISSAN controller and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Highlight an item using the NISSAN control-ler and press the ENTER button.

Available items:

● Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate theVoice Recognition system.

● Using the Address Book

Tutorial for using the Address Book.

● Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.

LSU0031 LSU0084


● Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voicecommand operation.

● Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctlyspeak commands in order for them to beproperly recognized by the system.

● Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available Voice Recognitionsettings.

● Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial for adapting the system to yourvoice.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the system is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe switch is pressed before the initializa-tion completes the display will show the mes-sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”or a beep sounds.

Before startingTo get the best performance from NISSAN VoiceRecognition, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminate thesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing the voice commands cor-rectly.

● When the climate control is in the AUTOmode, the fan speed decreases automati-cally for easy recognition.

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking acommand.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commands

1. Press and release the switch locatedon the steering wheel.

WHA1109


2. A list of commands appears on the screen,and the system announces, “Please say acommand from the displayed list or say Helpto show all commands.”


screen changes from to , speaka command.

4. Once a command is recognized, the systemwill announce the recognized command andperform the requested action.

If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice after the tone.

Operating tips● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the iconis .

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem repeats the announcement. Repeat thecommand in a clear voice.

● Press the switch on the steeringwheel to return to the previous screen.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressand hold the switch. The message,“Voice cancelled” will be announced.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-tem feedback, push the volume controlswitch on the steering wheel or use theaudio system volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

● To minimize the amount of prompts spokenby the system in Alternate Command Mode,use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.To access the Minimize Voice Feedbackfunction press the SETTING button, thenselect the “Others” key using the NISSANcontroller and press the ENTER button.Then select the “Voice Recognition” key us-ing the NISSAN controller and press theENTER button.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires a certain way tospeak numbers when giving voice commands.Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

● When saying the phone number 800-662-6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are alsosupported.

Examples:

● 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero six six two six twozero zero”

– “One eight hundred six six two six twozero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone num-bers by saying the phone number in three groupsof numbers. For example, when you try to call800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, andthe system will then ask you for the next threedigits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,the system will then ask for the last four digits.

LSU0033


Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method ofphone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-mance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak thenumber “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter“O” is included in the house number, it willnot be recognized as “0” even if you speak“oh” instead of “zero”.

Settings menuThe content of the Settings Menu differs whenthe system is in the Alternate Command Mode.

Command List:

Displays the command list for Alternate Com-mand Mode.

User Guide:

The user guide provides basic instructions forusing Voice Recognition and accessing somevoice commands.

NOTE:

The user guide can also be accessed fromwithin the INFO menu after pressing theINFO button.

Speaker Adaptation:

Starts a system training procedure to learn thespecific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-aptation function” in this section.

Alternate Command Mode:

For advanced operation, an Alternate CommandMode is provided. This setting enables control ofthe Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-tion to additional commands for the Phone andNavigation systems. With this setting active, thesystem does not announce or display the avail-able commands at each step. When this mode isactivated, the Voice Recognition Settings willchange to show more options.

Minimize Voice Feedback:

Reduces the amount of the information spokenfor each voice instruction.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTIONThe Voice Recognition system has a function tolearn the user’s voice for better voice recognitionperformance. The system can memorize thevoices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel, highlight the “Others” key on thedisplay and then press the ENTER button.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key andthen press the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Speaker Adaptation” key andthen press the ENTER button.

LSU0080


4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-rized by the system and press the ENTERbutton.

5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-tem from the following list and then press theENTER button.

● Navigation

● Audio

● Phone

● Vehicle Info.● Others

The voice commands in the category aredisplayed.

6. Select a voice command to train and thenpress the ENTER button.

The Voice Recognition system starts.

7. The system requests that you repeat a com-mand after a tone. This command is alsodisplayed on the screen.


screen changes from to , speakthe command that the system requested.

9. When the system has recognized the voicecommand, the voice of the user is learned.

Press the switch or the BACK button toreturn to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command correctly,the voice command indicator on the screen turnson.

LSU0034 LSU0082 LSU0036


Speaker Adaptation function settingsEdit Name:

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed onthe screen.

Store Result:

When this item is turned to ON, the Voice Rec-ognition system can easily recognize the user’svoice that it has learned.

Reset Result:

Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning:

When this item is turned to ON, you can have thesystem learn the voice commands in succession,without selecting commands one by one.

LSU0037


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, follow the solutions given in this guidefor the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number one,until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message SolutionDisplays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-NIZED” or the system fails to interpretthe command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” earlier in thissection.

2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.The system consistently selects thewrong voicetag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System with NavigationSystem” in this section.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Rear sonar system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Front sonar system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

WARNING

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.


EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates,doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)closed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withone of these open, follow theseprecautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

Starting and driving 5-3

even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted in all 4 tires. After the tire isinflated to the recommended pressure, thevehicle must be driven at speeds above 16MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressure warning light.Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tirepressure.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-pears in the vehicle information display whenthe low tire pressure warning light is illumi-nated and low tire pressure is detected. TheCHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns offwhen the low tire pressure warning lightturns off.

● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningdoes not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate a TPMSmalfunction.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all 4 tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Monitor,climate, audio, phone, and voice recognitionsystems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.


WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.Note: Changes or modification not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void the us-er’s authority to operate the equipment.


For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, include interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat beltas outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to doso.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person issignificantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person properly wearing aseat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If the right side or left side wheels unintentionallyleave the road surface, maintain control of thevehicle by following the procedure below. Pleasenote that this procedure is only a general guide.The vehicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out”can occur ifthe tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting acurb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can alsobe caused by driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and


tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.

● The vehicle generally moves or pulls inthe direction of the flat tire.

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

● Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.


● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear andapply brakes to control your speed.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed.

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.

● To avoid raising the center of gravityexcessively, do not exceed the ratedcapacity of the roof rack and evenlydistribute the load. Secure heavy loadsin the cargo area as far forward and aslow as possible. Do not equip the ve-hicle with tires larger than specified inthis manual. This could cause your ve-hicle to roll over.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

● Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.


● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehiclehas a higher center of gravity than apassenger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as passenger cars.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.

● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”

WARNING

● Never remove or turn the key to theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock (for models with asteering lock mechanism). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

● Never place the ignition switch in theLOCK position while driving. The steer-ing wheel will lock (for models with asteering lock mechanism). This maycause the driver to lose control of thevehicle and could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so

equipped)The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK until the shiftselector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When turning the ignition switch, make sure theshift selector is in the P (Park) position.

If the shift selector is not returned to the P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be movedtoward LOCK.

LSD0171

IGNITION SWITCH


When the ignition switch cannot be turned to-ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Keyis in range, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the switch toward the LOCK position.

The shift selector can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the foot brake pedal isdepressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCK andACC, although it does not show on the ignitionswitch. When the ignition switch is OFF, thesteering wheel is not locked (for models with asteering wheel lock mechanism).

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. To unlock thesteering wheel, push the ignition switch inand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped withthe Intelligent Key system is discharged,the ignition switch cannot be turned fromthe LOCK position, even using the me-chanical key.

Operating range

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged or strong radio waves are present nearthe operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-tem’s operating range becomes narrower andmay not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,it is possible for anyone, even someone who doesnot carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

LSD2001


The operating range of the engine start functionis inside of the vehicle �1 .

● The luggage area is not included in the op-erating range, but the Intelligent Key mayfunction.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-ment panel, inside the glove box, storage binor door pocket, the Intelligent Key may notfunction.

● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the dooror window outside the vehicle, the IntelligentKey may function.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONSPush in the ignition switch to the �B positionwhen you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) �A :

The ignition switch can only be locked in theLOCK position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed in, and turned to the ACC position �Cwhile carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories) �C :

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) �D :

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START �E :

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the ignition switchimmediately. It will automatically return to the ONposition.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back to theLOCK position unless the shift selector is in the P(Park) position. (It can be turned only to the �Bposition.)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON positions when theengine is not running for an extended pe-riod. This can discharge the battery.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe ignition lock is designed so the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK positionand the key cannot be removed until the shiftselector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition switch,make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)position.

If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be placed inthe LOCK position.

WSD0041


To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.


3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)position after the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or when the ignition switch cannotbe placed in the LOCK position, proceed asfollows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward theON position.


4. Remove the key.

The shift selector is designed so it cannot moveout of P (Park) and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or if the key is removed from theswitch.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-tion switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ON positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.For models without NISSAN vehicle immo-bilizer system: when the ignition switch isin the OFF position, the steering wheel isnot locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitionto the LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orright while turning the key to unlock thekey cylinder.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluidas frequently as possible, or at least when-ever you refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Check that all doors are closed.

● Position seat and adjust head restraint andheadrests (if so equipped).

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion. See “Warning/indicator lights and au-dible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switch isturned to the OFF position or if the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by placing the ignitionswitch in the START position. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODEThe engine has an engine protection mode toreduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem-perature becomes too high (for example, whenclimbing steep grades in high temperature withheavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).When the engine temperature reaches a certainlevel:

● The engine coolant temperature gauge willmove toward the H position.

● Engine power may be reduced.

● The air conditioning cooling function may beautomatically turned OFF for a short time(the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions, ve-hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can becontrolled with the accelerator pedal, but thevehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.The transmission will downshift or upshift as itreaches prescribed shift points. You can alsoshift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine coolanttemperature is reduced, vehicle speed can beincreased using the accelerator pedal, and airconditioning cooling function will automaticallybe turned back ON.

If:

1. The engine coolant temperature is not re-duced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function doesnot turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure warning/enginecoolant temperature high indicator il-luminates, this may indicate a malfunction.Move the vehicle off the road in a safe areaand allow the engine to cool. If after check-ing the oil and coolant, the remainson, do not continue to drive and call aNISSAN dealer.

The check engine light may also come ON. Ifonly it remains on, you do not need to have yourvehicle towed, but have it inspected soon by aNISSAN dealer. See “Check engine light” in the“Instruments and controls ” section of thismanual.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shifting iscompleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have anaccident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

● Except in an emergency, do not shift tothe N (Neutral) position while driving.Doing so can cause a loss of enginebraking which may result in a collision,serious personal injury or death. In ad-dition, coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.


The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK or OFF position.

To move the shift selector:

: Shift while depressing the brake pedal

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector out of the P(Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACCposition for any reason while the vehicle is in N(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to the LOCK position.Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position,then the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply theparking brake first, then move the shift selectorinto the P (Park) position.

WSD0187


R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

4 (Fourth gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

Do not downshift into the 4 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow-ing speeds in the 4 position.

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


2WD and AUTO:

71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode

62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode

4H:



4LO:



1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.


2WD and AUTO:



4H:



4LO:




Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift selector maynot be moved from the P (Park) position even withthe brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).However, the steering wheel will be locked un-less the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism).This allows the vehicle to be moved if the batteryis discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.


3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown.

4. Use a protective cloth on the tip of a smallscrewdriver before inserting it in the shiftlock release slot and pushing down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position while holding down the shift lockrelease.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON positionto unlock the steering wheel (for models witha steering lock mechanism).

7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the transmission will be locked in any of theforward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignitionswitch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Thenturn the ignition switch back to the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does not

LSD0090


return to its normal operating condition,have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-sion and repair it if necessary.

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift selector in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and itwill release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

LSD0158

PARKING BRAKE


1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON·OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the vehicle information display thenblinks to warn the driver, see “Vehicle infor-mation display” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, push thecruise control ON·OFF switch off and havethe system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-erly set the cruise control system, use thefollowing procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light inthe vehicle information display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in thevehicle information display will illuminate. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehiclemaintains the set speed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the vehicle information display goesout.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

LSD0159

CRUISE CONTROL


● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the vehicle information display go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the vehicle information displaygoes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE


● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● For vehicles equipped with , use 4Hor 4L position only when necessary. Four-wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

WARNING

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states, provinces or territories foremissions testing), or similar equip-ment even if the other two wheels areraised off the ground. Make sure youinform test facility personnel that yourvehicle is equipped with 4WD before itis placed on a dynamometer. Using thewrong test equipment may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)


CAUTION

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the shift selector to the N posi-tion with the brake pedal depressed,and shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.


● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESAll mode 4WD system provides 4 positions(AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to the drivingconditions.


2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitch Position Wheels Driven

Indicator LightUse Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

AUTO

Rear wheels or 4wheels

For driving on paved or slipperyroads

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> AUTO <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfershift position engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFTSELECTOR TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OP-ERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHENDRIVING STRAIGHT.

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads(Economy drive)

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered roads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages the automatictransmission mechanical parkinglock, which will allow the vehicle toroll. Do not leave the transfer shiftposition in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the shift selector to the N position.3. Push the 4WD shift switch and move it to

4LO or 4H with the brake pedal depressed.YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WDSHIFT SWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRSTSTOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THEBRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT SE-LECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO

4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power andtraction is required (for example: onsteep grades or rocky, sandy, muddyroads)

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the shift selector has been moved to theN position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Thenthe light will turn on or off.• Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.


*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicatorlights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when4LO is selected. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are four types of drivemodes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and4LO.

You must push the switch in to select 4LO,and the vehicle MUST be stationary and theshift selector in the N position when chang-ing into or out of 4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and make surethat the 4WD shift indicator light is on andthe ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise,the vehicle could unexpectedly move evenif the automatic transmission is in the Pposition.

CAUTION

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain components,Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H isnot recommended.

● The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 MPH(50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while drivingon steep downhill grades. Use the en-gine brake and low automatic transmis-sion gears (D1 or D2) for enginebraking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with therear wheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD or AUTO position under theseconditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or4LO.

● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.


When the vehicle is stuck,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeatforward and backward movement to in-crease the movement.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above. Tirechains may be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO position, depend-ing on driving conditions.

● With the switch set to the AUTO position,distribution of torque to the front and rearwheels changes automatically, dependingon road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 :100 (2WD) → 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This resultsin improved driving stability.

● If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the ignition switch isturned off while in the AUTO, 4H or4LO, you may feel a jolt. This is notabnormal.

● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the shift selector is shifted to N orP. This occurs because the transferclutch is released and not because of amalfunction.

CAUTION

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4Hposition. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch whiledriving on steep downhill grades. Usethe engine brake and low automatictransmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-gine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

LSD0144


● Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD or AUTO,ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so candamage the 4WD system.

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● Engine idling speed is high while warm-ing up the engine. Be especially carefulwhen starting or driving on slippery sur-faces with the 4WD shift switch set inAUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in thevehicle information display.

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

● The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator lightwill come on. If the indicator light doesnot come on immediately, make surethe area around the vehicle is safe, anddrive the vehicle straight, accelerate ordecelerate or move the vehicle in re-verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

● When the 4WD shift switch is turned tothe AUTO position at low ambient tem-peratures, the 4WD shift indicator lightmay show 4H. If this happens, all fourwheels are driven as torque distributionis in the 4H position. Be careful as thevehicle may become difficult to turn.When the vehicle is driven, the 4WDshift indicator light should change toAUTO.

LSD0147


● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-tion changes to 2WD when the 4WDshift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4Hposition at low ambient temperatures,the 2WD mode may be being engageddue to malfunctioning drive system. Ifthe indicator does not return to normaland the 4WD warning light comes on,have the system checked by the nearestNISSAN dealer.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinkswhen:

Comes on

There is a mal-function in the4–wheel drive

system

Blinks rap-idly

The transfercase oil tem-

perature is ab-normally high

Blinksslowly

The differencein wheel rota-tion is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon afterthe engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the ignition switch is ON, the warning lightwill either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

High-temperature transfer case oil makes thewarning light blink rapidly (about twice per sec-ond). If the warning light blinks rapidly duringoperation, stop the vehicle in a safe place imme-diately. Then if the light goes off after a while, youcan continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Changethe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drivefast.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksslowly during operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warninglight turns on.

● When the warning light comes on, the2WD mode may be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Beespecially careful when driving. If corre-sponding parts are malfunctioning, the4WD mode will not be engaged even ifthe 4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:

– in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,move the shift selector to the N posi-tion with the brake pedal depressed,and shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD.



● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking.

WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftselector has been pushed as far forwardas it can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: �A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: �B

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: �C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.


The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.


WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly appliesand releases hydraulic pressure. This action issimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,the VDC System helps to perform the followingfunctions:

● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheelslip on one slipping drive wheel so power istransferred to a non slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

● Controls brake pressure and engine outputto reduce drive wheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. See “Us-ing four wheel drive (4WD)” earlier in thissection.

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheelsand engine output to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in the following condi-tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not followthe steered path despite increased steer-ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


The VDC system can help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but it can not prevent lossof vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi-cator in the instrument panel flashes so note thefollowing:

● The road may be slippery or the system maydetermine some action is required to helpkeep the vehicle on the steered path.

● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or vibration from under thehood. This is normal and indicates that theVDC system is working properly.

● Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-ments and controls” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theand indicator lights come on in the instru-ment panel. The VDC system automatically turnsoff when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDCsystem. The indicator illuminates to indi-cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off thesystem, the VDC system still operates to preventone drive wheel from slipping by transferringpower to a non slipping drive wheel. Theindicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDCfunctions are off and the indicator will notflash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to onwhen the ignition switch is placed in the offposition then back to the on position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The VDC system is designed to help thedriver maintain stability but does notprevent accidents due to abrupt steer-ing operation at high speeds or by care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drivecarefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANrecommended for your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly. This couldadversely affect vehicle handling per-formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indi-cator lights may illuminate.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are extremelydeteriorated, the VDC system may notoperate properly and both theand the indicator lights mayilluminate.

● If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the andindicator lights may illuminate.


● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicatorlights may illuminate. This is not a mal-function. Restart the engine after driv-ing onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the NISSANrecommended ones are used, the VDCsystem may not operate properly andthe indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights mayilluminate.

● The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

WARNING

● Always turn and look back before back-ing up. The RSS is not a substitute forproper backing procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe rear sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the RSS; this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.


● If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumperwhen the shift selector is in R (Reverse). Thesystem may not detect objects at speeds above 3mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angularor moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft (1.0 m)from the rear bumper with a decreased coveragearea at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer tothe illustration for approximate zone coverageareas). As you move closer to the obstacle, therate of the tone increases. When the obstacle isless than 12 in (30.0 cm) away, the tone willsound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-ary or receding object further than 12 in (30.0cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will

LSD0095

REAR SONAR SYSTEM


sound for only 3 seconds. Once the system de-tects an object approaching, the tone will soundagain.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shiftselector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignitionswitch is ON. The front and rear sonar system offswitch on the instrument panel allows the driverto turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off,the ignition switch must be ON, and the shiftselector in R (Reverse). An indicator light on theswitch will illuminate when the system is turnedoff. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSSis not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction inthe RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bum-per fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumu-lations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects). If the sensors are covered, it will affectthe accuracy of the RSS.

WARNING

● Always look around before proceeding.The FSS is not a substitute for properdriving procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe front sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the FSS, this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.


● If your vehicle sustains damage to thefront bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Front Sonar System (FSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the front bum-per when the shift selector is in a forward gear.The system may not detect objects at speedsabove 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certainangular or moving objects.

The FSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft (1.0 m) fromthe front bumper with a decreased coverage areaat the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to theillustration for approximate zone coverage areas).As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of thetone increases. When the obstacle is less than12 in (30.0 cm) away, the tone will sound con-tinuously. If the FSS detects a stationary or re-ceding object further than 12 in (30.0 cm) fromthe side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only

LSD0202

FRONT SONAR SYSTEM (if soequipped)


3 seconds. Once the system detects an objectapproaching, the tone will sound again.

The FSS automatically turns on when the shiftselector is placed in a forward gear and theignition switch is ON. The front and rear sonarsystem off switch on the instrument panel allowsthe driver to turn the FSS on and off. To turn theFSS off, the ignition switch must be ON, and theshift selector in D (Drive). An indicator light on theswitch will illuminate when the system is turnedoff. If the indicator light illuminates when the FSSis not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction inthe FSS.

Keep the FSS sensors (located on the front bum-per fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumu-lations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects). If the sensors are covered, it will affectthe accuracy of the FSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole, or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped) or the NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.


To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECKTIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicleinformation display, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys-tem also displays pressure of all tires (except thespare tire) on the display screen by sending asignal from a sensor that is installed in eachwheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you ofit by the low tire pressure warning light. Thissystem will activate only when the vehicle isdriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Formore details, refer to “Warning/indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure information” inthe “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems” section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks �1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire�2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools1. Lift the luggage board in the cargo area and

remove the jack tool kit �A from the storagearea. See “Cargo area storage bin” in the“Instruments and controls” section.

2. Remove the cargo area storage bin cover.See “Cargo area storage bin” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section.

WCE0044 LCE0158

In case of emergency 6-3

3. Unscrew the rotating mechanism �A coun-terclockwise until loosened on cradle. Re-move the jack.

4. Assemble the two straight pieces of the jackrod. Find the oval-shaped opening abovethe middle of the license plate. Pass theT-shaped end of the jack rod through theopening and direct it toward the spare tirewinch, located directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged inthe spare tire winch and turn the jack rodcounterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle.

WCE0192 LCE0084 LCE0085


CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-ing plate on the wheel and then lift thespare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the illustration for the correctplacement and jack-up points for your specificvehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

NOTE:

Before jacking up the vehicle, make surethe ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition. If the vehicle is lifted up with theignition switch placed in the ON positionthe auto-leveling suspension (if soequipped) will become disabled after 60seconds. To reset the auto-leveling sus-pension, cycle the ignition switch ON/OFFone time.


2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Thejack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jackas shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

WCE0139 LCE0087


Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped) ofthe tire pressure information may showhigher pressure than the COLD tire pres-sure after the vehicle has been driven morethan 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tirepressure increases as the tire temperaturerises. This does not indicate a system mal-function.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

WCE0063


● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

If the battery of a vehicle equipped with theNISSAN Intelligent Key ™ is discharged, theignition switch cannot be moved from theLOCK position, even when using the me-chanical key or the valet key. Connect thejumper cables to another vehicle, as in thecase of a discharged battery, and then theignition switch can be moved from theLOCK position. Then, jump start the ve-hicle.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep allsparks and flames away from thebattery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-tioner, etc.).

3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequenceillustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0054


WARNING

Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Attempt-ing to do so may cause transmissiondamage.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant reser-voir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading andthe illumination of the engine oil pressure/enginecoolant temperature high indicator light), or if youfeel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by placingthe ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. This may cause damage to thelock mechanism (for models with asteering lock mechanism).

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE1037


Four-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

● Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

● Attach recovery devices only to mainstructural members of the vehicle or therecovery hooks.

WCE0162 LCE0083


● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to towor free a stuck vehicle.

● Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

● Always pull the recovery device straightout from the front of the vehicle. Neverpull at an angle.

● Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle except theattachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-vice.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing orvehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(VDC).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D.

● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision or injury:

● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver frontposition.

● Use only genuine NISSAN floor matsspecifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model. See your NISSAN dealerfor more information.

● Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning aid.See �Floor mat positioning aid� in thissection.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-tained with regular cleaning and replaced if theybecome excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR


Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes two driver’s side front floormat brackets and one passenger’s side front floormat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place.Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been speciallydesigned for your vehicle model. The driver’s sidefloor mat has two grommet holes incorporated init and the passenger’s side has one grommethole. Position each mat by placing the floor matbracket hook through the floor mat grommetholes while centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

LAI0009

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-29

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money.However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition, as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the shift selector inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraints andheadrests move up and down smoothly and thelocks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluidlevel is between the MIN and MAX lines on thereservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.


When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selector toP (Park).

● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion and the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable before workingnear the fan.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


1. Battery2. Fuse/fusible link box3. Transmission dipstick4. Engine oil filler cap5. Brake fluid reservoir6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Drive belt location9. Radiator cap10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Engine oil dipstick12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0630

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith a pre-diluted mixture of 50% GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze andcoolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

● Never use any cooling system additivessuch as radiator sealer. Additives mayclog the cooling system and causedamage to the engine, transmissionand/or cooling system.

● When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-dilutedto provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-tion is needed due to weather whereyou operate your vehicle, add GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) concentrate following the direc-tions on the container. If an equivalentcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) isused, follow the coolant manufacturer’sinstructions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solutionsother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentmay damage the engine coolingsystem.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-ant other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-ing Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. Refer to the Nissan Service andMaintenance Guide for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy ofthe factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant orthe use of non-distilled water will reduce the lifeexpectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to theNISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide formore details.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-ized tank. When installing the cap, tightenit until a clicking sound is heard.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the engineis hot. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

LDI0369


CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks �B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark �A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI0370 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL


CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap �A by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug�B .

5. Remove the drain plug �B with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

WDI0504


CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter �A .

4. Loosen the oil filter �A with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead to anoil leak and engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. IfGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is notavailable, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFmay also be used.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic SATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-tion in driveability and automatic trans-mission durability, and may damage theautomatic transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

WDI0505

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID


The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAXdepending on system fluid temperature. Removethe cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damagethe brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake fluid is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containersout of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

WDI0256

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID


BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the lowwindshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, liftthe cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount ofwindshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methyl al-cohol based washer fluid concentratesmay permanently stain the grille ifspilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the windshield-washer fluid reser-voir. Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the washer fluidconcentrate and water.

LDI0374 LDI0375

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID


● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, anelectrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-gen gas generated by the battery is ex-plosive. Explosive gases can causeblindness or injury. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabricsor painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or injury. After touch-ing a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver asshown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

WDI0224

BATTERY


2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstallthe vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

LDI0302

LDI0706

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM


The current sensor �A is located near the batteryalong the negative battery cable. If you add elec-trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure toground them to a suitable body ground such asthe frame or engine block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Automatic belt tensioner3. Water pump4. Cooling fan5. Air conditioner compressor6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0661

DRIVE BELT


REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleanercover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

SDI1895 WDI0712

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER


NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box screws.WDI0622


2. Open the glove box, then remove the threeupper glove box screws. Remove the glovebox assembly from the instrument panel toaccess the in-cabin microfilter cover.

3. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove thefilter cover.

NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrow shouldface the rear of the vehicle. The arrowsshould face downward.

4. Insert the first filter into the housing and slideit over to the right. Insert the second filterinto the housing.

5. Replace the filter cover.

6. Install the glove box assembly.

7. Fill out the date information on the smallreplacement label and attach it to the glovebox lid.

WDI0623 LDI0387 LDI0404


CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

6. Return the wiper to its original position andrelease it until it has made contact with thewindshield.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle�A . This may cause clogging or improper wind-shield washer operation. If wax gets into thenozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin �B .

WDI0629


Rear window wiper blade

�1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

�2 Rotate the blade until it becomes free.

�3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

LDI0379


If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES


If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0380


5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with a newfuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box to access the fuse boxcover.

3. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

WDI0452 LDI0618


5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �B .

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Extended storage switchIf any electrical equipment does not operate,remove the extended storage switch and checkfor an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used forlong term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-tended storage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replace only theopen fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

Type AWDI0452

Type BLDI0456 LDI2035


How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, besure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFFposition.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs �1 found on eachside of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from thefuse box �2 .

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT


KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

�1 Open the lid using a coin �A .

�2 Remove the battery �B .

�3 Install a new battery �C with the “+” facingdown.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding thebattery across the contact points will seri-ously deplete the storage capacity.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electricterminals as it could cause a malfunction.

● When changing the battery, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

● There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace onlywith the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

�4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

LDI0484


FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changesor modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if soequipped)Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver �A into the slit �Bof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

WDI0620


4. Close the lid securely as illustrated �C �D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Note: Changes

or modifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

For Canada:This device complies with RSS-210 of In-dustry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause unde-sired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0621

LIGHTS


NOTE:

Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed as shown in the chart.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog lightfor a long period of time as dust, mois-ture and smoke may enter the fog lightbody and affect the performance of thefog light.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. The fog light is accessible in front of thefront tire and behind the bumper.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector �1 .

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the foglight assembly. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it. Do not touch theglass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:

To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Accessthe aiming screw from underneath the frontbumper. The aiming screw is located on thebottom of the fog light housing. Turn thescrew clockwise to raise the pattern. Turnthe screw counterclockwise to lower thepattern.

LDI0382


EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly*High 65 9005 (HB3)Low 55 9006 (HB4)Park/Turn 28/8 3457KSidemarker 3.8 194

Side turn signal light* (if so equipped) — (LED)Front fog light 55 H11Puddle lamp 9 906Room/map lights 8 –Personal lights 6 WXW52Footwell* 3.4 1 58Glove box light* 3.4 158Vanity mirror light 1.8 –Step light 3.8 194Cargo light 8 AL67High-mounted stop light* — (LED)Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 27/8 3157KX RDBackup (reversing) 18 921LFTurn 18 3156K

License plate light 5 W5W

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

LDI0383


1. Room/map light2. Front personal lights3. Step light4. Puddle lamp/Side turn signal light (if so

equipped)5. High-mount stoplight6. Cargo light7. License plate light8. Rear combination light9. Headlight assembly10. Fog light

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installation

Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.

WDI0263Map lights

LDI0389


Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.Personal lights

LDI0364

Vanity mirrorLDI0385

Step lightLDI0341


Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.Puddle light

LDI0388

Cargo lightWDI0233

License plate lightLDI0384


If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE warning appears in the ve-hicle information display, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pres-sure of all tires (except the spare tire) onthe display screen by sending a signalfrom a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phoneand voice recognition systems” section,“Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

Rear combination lightWDI0403

WHEELS AND TIRES


● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label. Donot load your vehicle beyond thiscapacity. Overloading your ve-hicle may result in reduced tirelife, unsafe operating conditionsdue to premature tire failure, orunfavorable handling character-istics and could also lead to aserious accident. Loading be-yond the specified capacity mayalso result in failure of other ve-hicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.


Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI0485


Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:P265/70R18P275/60R20

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P265/70R18P275/60R20

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:P265/70R18P275/60R20

240 kPa, 35 PSI

LDI0393


TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleWDI0395


�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture.

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396


�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the low tire pres-sure warning system.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.


If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installedon P275/60R20 size tires. Installation ofthe tire chains/cables on P275/60R20 sizetires will cause damage to the vehicle. Ifyou plan to use tire chains/cables, youshould install P265/70R18 size tires onyour vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section in this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258


Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to acci-dents and could result in serious per-sonal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system and/or interferencewith the brake discs/drums. Such inter-ference can lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brake pad/shoewear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information”section of this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.



● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.


If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tires be replaced with tires of thesame size, brand, construction and tread pattern.The tire pressure and wheel alignment shouldalso be checked and corrected as necessary.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.


9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation(without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuelrecommendation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-34Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-35

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 28 gal 23-1/4 gal 105.8 See “ Fuel recommendations” later in this section.*1

Engine oil *8Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt 6.5 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2• Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter change 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2

Cooling systemWith reservoir 3-3/4 gal 3-1/8 gal 14.4 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *3

Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6

Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6

Transfer fluid 3-1/8 qt 2-5/8 qt 3.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *7

Front differential gear oil 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt 1.6 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Vis-cosity SAE 80W-90 *9

Rear differential gear oil 3-3/4 pt 3-1/8 pt 1.75 API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90*10

Windshield-washer fluid (shared betweenfront and rear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze orequivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation” in this section.*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.*3: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or

Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by theNISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

*4: DEXTRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label” in this section.*7: Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer case durability, and may damage the transfer case, which is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*8: For further details, see “Changing engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 80W-90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° C (32° F).*10: See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (withoutFlexible Fuel Vehicle option)

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION


● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.


Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUELRECOMMENDATION (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel Etha-nol, “Regular” unleaded regular gasoline or anypercentage of the two fuels combined.

U.S. government regulations require FuelEthanol dispensing pumps to have a small,square, orange and black label with thecommon abbreviation or the appropriatepercentage for that region.

CAUTION

Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanolmay cause powertrain damage or a loss ofvehicle performance.


General information

This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles (FFV)only. FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuelfiller door label that states Ethanol (E-85) orUnleaded Gasoline Only. This section only cov-ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuelvehicles.

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door labelcan operate on E-85. Fuel system or otherdamage can occur if E-85 is used in vehiclesthat are not designed to run on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel etha-nol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING

● Ethanol vapors are extremely flam-mable and could cause serious per-sonal injury.

● Never have any smoking materials lit inor near the vehicle when removing thefuel filler cap or filling the tank.

● Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent andnever use it near an open flame.

Fuel requirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regulargasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI(Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane num-ber 91), or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two.

For the best starting and vehicle driveability re-sults, do not continually switch between E-85and unleaded regular gasoline. If you must switchfuels, NISSAN recommends the following:

● do not switch when the fuel gauge indicatesless than 1/4 full

● add more than 5 gallons of fuel● operate the vehicle immediately after refuel-

ing for a period of at least 5 minutes

NOTE:

When the ambient temperature is above90°F (32°C), you may experience hard start-ing and rough idle following start up even ifthe above recommendations are followed.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuit-able for use when ambient temperatures fall be-low 0°F (-18°C). In the range of 0°F (-18°C) to32°F (0°C), you may experience an increase inthe time it takes for you engine to start, and adeterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesita-tions) until the engine is fully warmed up.

Fuel consumption

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gal-lon than gasoline, you will experience an increasein fuel consumption. You can expect your fuelmileage to decrease by about 30% compared togasoline operation.

Replacement parts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle(FFV) are designed to be compatible with etha-nol. Always be sure that your vehicle is servicedwith correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION

Replacing fuel system components withnon-ethanol compatible components candamage your vehicle and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

Maintenance

If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel, followthe correct maintenance log shown in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

CAUTION

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficultyin cold starting and may affect drivability.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183


Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/Csystem oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.


ENGINE

Model VK56DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plugStandard Model FFV ModelDILFR5A-11 DILFR5A-11D

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chainThis spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

18 x 8.0JJ

20 x 8.0JJ

Tires

P265/70R18

P275/60R20

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 207.7 (5,275)Overall width in (mm) 79.3 (2,016)Overall height

2wd with roof rack in (mm) 77.2 (1,962)4wd with roof rack in (mm) 78.0 (1,982)

Front Track18 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)20 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)

Rear Track18 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)20 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)

Wheelbase in (mm) 123.2 (3,130)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the

center pillar between thedriver’s side front and rear

doors.

Gross axle weight ratingFront lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0095 WTI0099 WTI0189


TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at thelocation mark (small dimple) using a 0.20 in(5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.Install the license plate holder using the twoscrews provided with the holder.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

WTI0100 WTI0220 LTI0093

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label.

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.


Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

SECURING THE LOADThere are tie down hooks located in the cargoarea as shown. The tie down hooks can be usedto secure cargo with ropes or other types ofstraps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55lbs. (245 N) to a single �A plastic hook or 44lbs. (196 N) to a single �B plastic hookwhen securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-downhook when securing cargo.

WARNING


● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooksLTI0089

Cargo area floor tie-down hooksLTI0090


● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.


WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) should not exceed the value specifiedin the following “Towing Load/Specification”chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0162

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -15 percent of the total trailer load or use thetrailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-facturer. The tongue load must be within themaximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 ATI1025


Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue/king pin load, use the following proce-dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, usethe following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the�Towing Load/Specification� chart foundlater in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification� chart -15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-ing Load/Specification� chart - 9,100 lb.(4,128 kg).

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg) GVWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lb. (409 kg) Available for tongueweight

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg) GCWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg) Capacity available fortowing

900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight


The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within thetrailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

US US CAN2WD 4WD 4WD

Maximum Towing Ca-pacity*1 *2

w/o tow package6,500 lb.

(2,948 kg)6,500 lb.

(2,948 kg)6,500 lb.

(2,948 kg)

with tow package9,100 lb.

(4,128 kg)9,000 lb.

(4,082 kg)9,000 lb.

(4,082 kg)

Maximum TongueLoad

w/o tow package650 lb.

(295 kg)650 lb.

(295 kg)650 lb.

(295 kg)

with tow package910 lb.

(413 kg)900 lb.

(408 kg)900 lb.

(408 kg)

Maximum GrossCombined Weight

Rating

w/o tow package12,800 lb.

(5,806 kg)13,000 lb.

(5,897 kg)13,000 lb.

(5,897 kg)

with tow package15,100 lb.

(6,849 kg)15,100 lb.

(6,849 kg)15,100 lb.

(6,849 kg)*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achievethe rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi-cle’s maximum towing capacity.*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.


TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optionaltrailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Thishitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity ofthis vehicle when the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ballthat is rated for the trailer to be towed. GenuineNISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are availablefrom your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, check the towing capacity ofyour bumper hitch or receiver-type framemounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for yourvehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailerhitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Makesure the trailer hitch is securely attached to thevehicle to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount isone that is designed to carry the whole amount oftongue weight and gross weight directly on theball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ballmount and to the trailer to distribute the tongueweight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehiclescan’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer,and need some of the tongue weight transferredthrough the frame and pushing down on the frontwheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) isrecommended if you plan to tow trailers with amaximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) .Check with the trailer and towing equipmentmanufacturers to determine if they recommendthe use of a weight-distributing hitch system.


NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. Ifyou are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surgebrake-equipped trailer, check with thesurge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturerto determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-turer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.With the ignition on and the doors closed,allow the vehicle to stand for several minutesso that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjustthe hitch equalizers so that the front bumperheight is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) ofthe reference height measured in step 2. Therear bumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. If therear bumper is higher than the measuredreference height when loaded, the vehiclemay handle unpredictably which couldcause a loss of vehicle control and causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). Aweight distributing hitch should be used to towtrailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVtrailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb(4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve-hicle is only capable of towing the maximumtrailer weights shown in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart earlier in this section.


CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts andhitch balls for pickup trucks and sportutility vehicles are available at aNISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the tireplacard.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safetychains can be attached to the bumper if the hitchball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with theoptional trailer tow package are equipped with a7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer isequipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapterwill be needed to connect the trailer lights to thevehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN dealersas well as auto parts stores and hitch retailers.


Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, most statesrequire a separate braking system on trailers witha loaded weight above a specific amount. Makesure the trailer meets the local regulations andthe regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic linerunning to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes areactivated by the trailer pushing against the hitchball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulicsurge brakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system, there isno hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-tems are activated by an electronic signal sentfrom a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer brakes areused, see “Electric trailer brake controller” in thissection.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-ment make sure the trailer brakes are properlyinstalled and demonstrate proper brake functiontesting.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controllerTrailers equipped with electric brakes may re-quire the installation of an aftermarket trailerbrake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connector andjumper harness that is specifically designed to beused when installing an aftermarket brake con-troller.

exampleLTI0117


To install the electric trailer brake controllerjumper harness, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to therearmost position.

2. Apply the parking brake to access thejumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connector underthe lower portion of the instrument panel.The connector is taped to the wiring harness�1 as indicated.

● The connector is marked with a white tagwith “elec brake conn”.

LTI0122 LTI0115


Wire color designation for electric trailer brakecontroller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTERED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch

to trailer brake controller.BLACK Brake controller ground

(-).BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.RED/BLUE Trailer brake controller

illumination.RED Fused trailer brake con-

troller battery feed (B+).

4. Peel off the tape and connect the jumperharness to the connector �2 .

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brakecontroller according to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

Pre-towing tips● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in thetrailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicle andtrailer so the required clearance is known.

LTI0116


Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadver-tently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case is in4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. Ifthe indicator light is flashing, or theATP light is ON, make sure the transmissionis in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switchto 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmissionpark warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section and “Using four wheeldrive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”section.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-tain adequate control, reduce your speedand shift to a lower gear. Avoid long orrepeated use of the brakes when descend-ing a hill, as this reduces their effectivenessand could cause overheating. Shifting to alower gear instead provides “engine brak-ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-quently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.


● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol not be used while towing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

Tow modeUsing tow mode is recommended when pulling aheavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press theTOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. Theindicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi-nates when tow mode is selected. Press theTOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off.Tow mode is automatically cancelled when theignition switch is turned OFF.


Tow mode includes the following features:

● Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shiftswhen pulling a trailer or hauling a load up agrade.

● Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automati-cally downshifts when driving down a gradewith a trailer or heavy load to help controlvehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will not causeany damage. However, fuel economy may bereduced and the transmission/engine drivingcharacteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

WARNING

Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.Installing a snowplow may affect vehiclehandling. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

SNOW PLOW


DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform Transport Canada in additionto notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,it may open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-port Canada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-fect Investigations and Recalls Divisiontoll free at 1-800-333-0510. You mayalso report safety defects online at:https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


Additional information concerning motorvehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-port Canada’s Road Safety InformationCentre at 1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concernsplease contact our Consumer InformationCentre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or thebattery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset toa “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test,check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignition switch in theON position without starting the engine. If theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steadyfor 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , theI/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “readycondition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


MEMO


10 Index4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

A

Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-18Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-13Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-36Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-38Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-39

Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-26Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-14Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-32Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-51Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-59

Audio SystemCompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . .4-61

Audio systemFM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56

Audio SystemMusic Box� hard-disk drive audiosystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63

Audio systemRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76

Audio SystemSettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48, 4-56

Audio systemSteering wheel audio control switch . . .4-74

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-36Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-53Automatic transmission positionindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-15

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-32Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54, 4-61

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Bluetooth� hands-free phone system . . . .4-92,

4-107Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-32Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-32Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-20, 8-23Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-19Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-16, 4-32Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. .9-2Captain’s chair adjustment (2nd row) . . . . . .1-5Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . .9-14Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72CD changer (See audio system) . . . . . . . .4-51CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-59Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Child restraints . . . . . . .1-35, 1-35, 1-36, 1-38

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-36, 1-44,1-49, 1-54

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-42Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-41Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49, 4-57

(models with navigation system) . . .4-11, 4-27Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-27C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-12Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-59CompactFlash (CF) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-61Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 2-47Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . .4-16, 4-32Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-16Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19Without navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-2

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-74

Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-36Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-38

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-69

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-32Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Digital video disc DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-33Display controls(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-16Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-21Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-15Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-12Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-33Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-7Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-16Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

10-2

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-34Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-64Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-25, 3-28

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth� . . . .4-92,4-107

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-34Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Headphones (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-36Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-38

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-59Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-12In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-32Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-33Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-33Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-17Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

10-3

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-17

Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-7

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-13C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-12Emission control information label . . . . .9-12Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-12Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-13Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-11Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-71

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-13Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-18Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-32

Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-66Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-28Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-16Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-50Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-14Luggage storage (see vehicle loadinginformation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

M

MaintenanceChanging the maintenance interval . .4-7, 4-23Displaying the maintenance noticereminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-24General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Resetting the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-24Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-23Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-33Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-32Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Music Box� hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-63

10-4

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key™. . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-12NISSAN mobile entertainment system(MES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-27, 3-4,

5-13NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-118

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-7Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Pedal position adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58Phone, Bluetooth� hands-freesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92, 4-107Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Power vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3Precautions on child restraints . . .1-36, 1-44,1-49, 1-54Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-25Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-70Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-91Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . . .4-51FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-74

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . . .2-37RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-29Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-11Remote controller (See NISSAN mobileentertainment system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . .3-7Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-33Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-21Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

10-5

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7Child seat belts . . . . .1-36, 1-44, 1-49, 1-54Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-33

Screen (See NISSAN mobile entertainmentsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Second row captain’s chair. . . . . . . . . .1-5Third row power folding seats . . . . . . .1-23

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-35Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-25Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-70Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-34Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-33Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-28

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Seats

Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner. . . . . . . . . .3-36Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2Second row captain’s chair adjustment . . . . .1-5Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-25Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-33Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-69Sonar

Front system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19Steering

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-74Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Overhead storage compartment . . . . . .2-43Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 2-48Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-71Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-72, 2-18Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-64Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-71Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-57Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-53Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-30Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-37Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28

10-6

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13Third row power folding seats . . . . . . . . .1-23Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-13Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-32Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16

Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-22Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . . .4-6, 4-22Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-41Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-22Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Transceiver

HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-59Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-15Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-37Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-33Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . .4-13, 4-28Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13, 6-14Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-lizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13

Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-118Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

W

Warning4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-18Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-14Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-15Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Engine oil pressure low/engine coolanttemperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-66Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-71

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-10Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

10-7

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-53Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Power vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-28Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

10-8

RECOMMENDED FUEL (withoutFlexible Fuel Vehicle [FFV] option):

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION




● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV)FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if soequipped):If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuelvehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to use(E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regulargasoline or any percentage of the two fuels com-bined.

CAUTION



For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“Break-in schedule” information found in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-low these recommendations for the future reli-ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

®

2012 ARMADAOWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2012 N

ISS

AN

AR

MA

DA

TA

60

-D

Printing : July 2011 (17)

Publication No.: OM2E TA60U0

Printed in U.S.A. TA60-D‘12

2012 Nissan Armada | Owner's Manual | Nissan USA

Documents